Network Scan / Fax / Network Fax Operations

Océ
VarioLink 4522c
VarioLink 5522c
VarioLink 6522c
Printing for
Professionals
User’s Guide
Network Scan/
Fax/ Network Fax
Operations
.
Océ-Technologies B.V.
Copyright
2009,Océ-Technologies B.V. Venlo, The Netherlands.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, copied, adapted, or
transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission from Océ.
Océ-Technologies B.V. makes no representation or warranties with respect to the
contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, Océ-Technologies B.V. reserves the right to revise this publication and to
make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify
any person of such revision or changes.
edition:2009-09
GB
Table of contents
1
2
3
Introduction
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5
Symbols used in this manual. ............................................................................................................ 1-5
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2
Document and paper indications....................................................................................................... 1-6
Paper size .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Paper indication ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Before using the Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax functions
2.1
2.1.1
Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Transmission function........................................................................................................................ 2-3
Function type ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Notes on using fax functions (G3)...................................................................................................... 2-3
Notes on using Network Fax.............................................................................................................. 2-4
Notes on using Internet Fax............................................................................................................... 2-4
Notes on using IP Address Fax ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.2
User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-5
MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-5
External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-5
Account Track.................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Restriction on file name ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2
2.2.1
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Available operations with Network scan function.............................................................................. 2-7
E-Mail transmission............................................................................................................................ 2-7
FTP transmission ............................................................................................................................... 2-7
SMB transmission.............................................................................................................................. 2-8
User Box filing.................................................................................................................................... 2-8
WebDAV transmission ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Web Service....................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.2
Available operations with fax function ............................................................................................. 2-10
Sending/receiving G3 fax................................................................................................................. 2-10
Polling .............................................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.2.3
Available operations with Network function .................................................................................... 2-11
Internet Fax ...................................................................................................................................... 2-11
IP Address Fax................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-6
Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.2
Difference of screen display with/without optional devices............................................................... 3-8
If the fax kit FK-502 is not installed ................................................................................................... 3-8
If the fax kit FK-502 is installed.......................................................................................................... 3-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-1
3.2.3
4
5
Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-9
Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Job List - Delete............................................................................................................................... 3-10
Job List - Job Details ....................................................................................................................... 3-10
Check Job - Check Job Settings..................................................................................................... 3-18
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ................................................................. 3-18
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Scan Settings ........................................................................... 3-18
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Original Settings....................................................................... 3-19
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings.......................................................... 3-19
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.............................................................. 3-19
Registering the basic information
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
To begin operation.......................................................................................................................... 4-3
Environment and device requirements .............................................................................................. 4-3
Network connection and settings ...................................................................................................... 4-3
Connection to network....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Network settings ................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Specifying an E-mail address for this machine.................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.3
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
Connection of modular cable............................................................................................................. 4-4
Store Address.................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Address Book .................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Group ................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Optional settings ............................................................................................................................. 4-6
Fax/Scan programs ........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Custom display settings .................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
Using the Web service.................................................................................................................... 4-7
Settings required to use the Web service .......................................................................................... 4-7
Installing the driver program of this machine to a computer ............................................................. 4-7
Check before installation ................................................................................................................... 4-7
Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................ 4-7
Sending
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.2
5.2.1
Operation flow................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Scan/Network Fax ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
G3 fax................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Recalling a program........................................................................................................................... 5-7
Broadcasting...................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Using the advanced preview........................................................................................................ 5-11
Preview screen................................................................................................................................. 5-11
Preview - View Pages ...................................................................................................................... 5-11
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting .......................................................................................... 5-12
Preview - View Status ...................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.2
Sending with the advanced preview ................................................................................................ 5-13
Sending with Advanced Preview ..................................................................................................... 5-13
5.3
Fax/scan mode menu tree ........................................................................................................... 5-15
[Address Book] tab .......................................................................................................................... 5-15
[Direct Input] tab .............................................................................................................................. 5-15
[Job History] tab............................................................................................................................... 5-16
[Address Search] tab ....................................................................................................................... 5-16
Off-Hook .......................................................................................................................................... 5-17
[Scan Settings] ................................................................................................................................. 5-17
[Original Settings]............................................................................................................................. 5-18
[Communication Settings]................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.4
5.4.1
Fax/Scan initial screen ................................................................................................................. 5-20
Description of screen components.................................................................................................. 5-20
Contents-2
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.5
Address Book ................................................................................................................................ 5-21
Me (Scan to Me)............................................................................................................................... 5-21
Home (Scan to Home)...................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.5.1
5.5.2
Group ............................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Search.............................................................................................................................................. 5-22
Address Type ................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Index ................................................................................................................................................ 5-23
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 5-24
Search Option .................................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
Direct Input .................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Fax ................................................................................................................................................... 5-25
E-mail ............................................................................................................................................... 5-25
User Box .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Internet Fax ...................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 5-26
Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.6.5
IP Address Fax................................................................................................................................. 5-27
Address ............................................................................................................................................ 5-27
Port Number..................................................................................................................................... 5-27
Destination Machine Type ............................................................................................................... 5-27
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.6.6
PC (SMB) ......................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-28
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 5-28
User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Reference......................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.6.7
FTP................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-29
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 5-29
User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Detailed Settings.............................................................................................................................. 5-29
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.6.8
WebDAV........................................................................................................................................... 5-30
Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-30
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 5-30
User Name ....................................................................................................................................... 5-30
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 5-30
Detailed Settings.............................................................................................................................. 5-30
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 5-30
5.6.9
Web Service..................................................................................................................................... 5-31
Detail ................................................................................................................................................ 5-31
Search.............................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.7
Job History..................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Name................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
Address Search ............................................................................................................................. 5-33
Search.............................................................................................................................................. 5-33
Advanced Search............................................................................................................................. 5-33
Name................................................................................................................................................ 5-33
E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 5-33
First Name........................................................................................................................................ 5-33
City................................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Company Name ............................................................................................................................... 5-34
Department ...................................................................................................................................... 5-34
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 5-34
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-3
5.9
Off-Hook (G3)................................................................................................................................. 5-35
Manual transmission ........................................................................................................................ 5-35
5.10
5.10.1
Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................ 5-36
Original Type .................................................................................................................................... 5-36
Text .................................................................................................................................................. 5-36
Text/Photo ....................................................................................................................................... 5-36
Photo................................................................................................................................................ 5-36
Dot Matrix Original ........................................................................................................................... 5-36
Copied Paper ................................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.10.2
Simplex/Duplex................................................................................................................................ 5-37
1-Sided ............................................................................................................................................ 5-37
2-Sided ............................................................................................................................................ 5-37
Cover + 2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.10.3
5.10.4
Resolution ........................................................................................................................................ 5-37
File Type........................................................................................................................................... 5-38
File Type........................................................................................................................................... 5-38
Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 5-39
Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 5-40
Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 5-41
Outline PDF ...................................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.10.5
5.10.6
Density ............................................................................................................................................. 5-42
Color (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/IP/I-FAX)............................................................................ 5-43
Auto Color ........................................................................................................................................ 5-43
Full Color.......................................................................................................................................... 5-43
Gray Scale........................................................................................................................................ 5-43
Black ................................................................................................................................................ 5-43
5.10.7
Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Standard .......................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 5-45
5.10.8
5.10.9
5.10.10
5.10.11
Image Adjustment - Background Removal...................................................................................... 5-45
Image Adjustment - Sharpness ....................................................................................................... 5-46
Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 5-46
Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 5-47
Book Spread .................................................................................................................................... 5-47
Separation........................................................................................................................................ 5-47
Front Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 5-47
Front + Back Covers ........................................................................................................................ 5-47
Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 5-47
Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 5-48
Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 5-48
5.10.12
Application - Annotation .................................................................................................................. 5-49
Selecting the Annotation User Box.................................................................................................. 5-49
5.10.13
Application - Stamp/Composition ................................................................................................... 5-49
Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Page Number ................................................................................................................................... 5-50
Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-51
Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-51
5.10.14
Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 5-52
Copies .............................................................................................................................................. 5-52
Simplex/Duplex................................................................................................................................ 5-52
Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.10.15
Application - TX Stamp (G3/IP/I-FAX).............................................................................................. 5-53
TX Stamp ......................................................................................................................................... 5-53
Stamping TX Stamp......................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.10.16
5.10.17
Document Name (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/I-FAX).............................................................. 5-54
Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-54
Contents-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6
5.11
5.11.1
5.11.2
5.11.3
5.11.4
5.11.5
5.11.6
5.11.7
5.12
5.12.1
Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 5-55
Special Original - Mixed Original ..................................................................................................... 5-55
Special Original - Z-Folded Original................................................................................................. 5-55
Special Original - Long Original ....................................................................................................... 5-55
Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 5-55
Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 5-56
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) (G3)........................................................................................ 5-56
Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 5-57
Communication Settings.............................................................................................................. 5-58
Line Settings (G3)............................................................................................................................. 5-58
Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 5-58
ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 5-58
V34 OFF ........................................................................................................................................... 5-59
Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 5-59
Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 5-59
5.12.2
E-Mail Settings (E-mail/I-FAX).......................................................................................................... 5-59
E-Mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 5-59
Document Name .............................................................................................................................. 5-59
Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 5-60
From................................................................................................................................................. 5-60
Body................................................................................................................................................. 5-60
5.12.3
URL Notification Setting (FTP/SMB/WebDAV) ................................................................................ 5-61
URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 5-61
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 5-61
Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 5-61
5.12.4
Communication Method Settings (G3)............................................................................................. 5-62
Quick Memory TX ............................................................................................................................ 5-62
Polling RX - Normal.......................................................................................................................... 5-63
Polling RX - Bulletin ......................................................................................................................... 5-63
Timer TX........................................................................................................................................... 5-64
Password TX .................................................................................................................................... 5-64
Polling TX - Normal .......................................................................................................................... 5-65
Polling TX - Bulletin.......................................................................................................................... 5-66
F-Code TX........................................................................................................................................ 5-67
5.12.5
5.12.6
5.12.7
5.13
5.13.1
5.13.2
5.13.3
E-Mail Encryption (E-mail)................................................................................................................ 5-67
Digital Signature (E-mail).................................................................................................................. 5-67
Fax Header Settings (G3/IP/I-FAX) .................................................................................................. 5-68
Redialing (G3/IP) ........................................................................................................................... 5-69
Auto redialing ................................................................................................................................... 5-69
Manual redialing............................................................................................................................... 5-69
Fax Retransmit (G3) ......................................................................................................................... 5-70
Receiving (G3/IP/I-FAX)
6.1
6.1.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.3
Receiving (G3: Without external telephone connected) .............................................................. 6-3
Auto RX (Dedicated for fax line) ......................................................................................................... 6-3
Receiving (G3: With external telephone connected).................................................................... 6-4
Manual RX (Dedicated telephone line) ............................................................................................... 6-4
Receiving (I-FAX)............................................................................................................................. 6-5
Receiving E-mails automatically ........................................................................................................ 6-5
Receiving E-mails manually ............................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
Receiving (IP)................................................................................................................................... 6-6
In-memory proxy reception............................................................................................................ 6-7
In-memory proxy reception................................................................................................................ 6-7
Forwarding of job after in-memory proxy reception (G3) .................................................................. 6-7
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-5
7
8
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
Printing upon data reception ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Printing at reduced size ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
Printing at reduced size to fit the paper size to be printed ................................................................ 6-8
Step 1: Select optimal paper size ...................................................................................................... 6-9
Step 2: Select actual print paper size .............................................................................................. 6-10
Restrictions for printing.................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.7
Printing at full size ............................................................................................................................ 6-12
Printing method upon data reception .............................................................................................. 6-13
Footer Position .............................................................................................................................. 6-14
Inside Body Text .............................................................................................................................. 6-14
Outside Body Text ........................................................................................................................... 6-14
Not Printed ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
Convenient functions (G3/IP/I-FAX)
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Memory RX (G3/IP/I-FAX)............................................................................................................... 7-3
PC-Fax RX (G3)................................................................................................................................ 7-3
TSI Distribution (G3)........................................................................................................................ 7-4
Confidential RX (G3)........................................................................................................................ 7-5
Settings required for confidential reception....................................................................................... 7-5
Receiving by confidential reception................................................................................................... 7-5
Sending by confidential transmission ................................................................................................ 7-5
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.7
7.8
7.9
Relay distribution (G3) .................................................................................................................... 7-6
Description of relay distribution ......................................................................................................... 7-6
To perform relay distribution.............................................................................................................. 7-6
Sending fax to the relay distribution station ...................................................................................... 7-7
Polling TX/RX (G3)........................................................................................................................... 7-8
Polling TX ........................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Polling RX........................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Bulletin (G3) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Fax transmission using extension lines (G3) ................................................................................ 7-9
Fax forwarding (G3)......................................................................................................................... 7-9
Description of reports and lists
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
Types of reports and lists............................................................................................................... 8-3
Reports .............................................................................................................................................. 8-3
Lists.................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Common lists .................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Address Book List.............................................................................................................................. 8-5
How to print ....................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Print sample ....................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Information included in the list........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2
Group List .......................................................................................................................................... 8-9
How to print ....................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Print sample ....................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Information included in the list......................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.3
Program List..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
How to print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Print sample ..................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Information included in the list......................................................................................................... 8-11
Contents-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9
8.3
8.3.1
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX.................................................................... 8-12
Activity Report.................................................................................................................................. 8-12
Print sample ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Information included in the list......................................................................................................... 8-13
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
TX Result Report.............................................................................................................................. 8-14
Broadcast Report............................................................................................................................. 8-14
Job Settings List .............................................................................................................................. 8-14
How to print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-14
Fax Setting List ................................................................................................................................ 8-15
Relay List.......................................................................................................................................... 8-16
Sender (TSI) RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 8-17
Confidential/Bulletin List .................................................................................................................. 8-17
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8.4.8
8.4.9
8.4.10
8.4.11
8.4.12
8.4.13
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
Report printed for G3 fax.............................................................................................................. 8-18
Polling TX Report ............................................................................................................................. 8-18
Polling RX Report............................................................................................................................. 8-18
Sequential Polling RX Report........................................................................................................... 8-18
Reservation Communication Report................................................................................................ 8-19
Reservation Polling TX Report ......................................................................................................... 8-19
Broadcast Reserved Report ............................................................................................................ 8-19
An address Polling Rx Reserved Report.......................................................................................... 8-20
Sequence Polling Rx Reserved Report............................................................................................ 8-20
Confidential RX Report .................................................................................................................... 8-20
Bulletin TX Report (Polling TX Report) ............................................................................................. 8-21
Relay TX Result Report .................................................................................................................... 8-21
Relay Request Report ...................................................................................................................... 8-21
PC-Fax TX Error Report ................................................................................................................... 8-22
Report printed for Internet Fax .................................................................................................... 8-23
Internet Fax RX Error Report............................................................................................................ 8-23
Print MDN Message......................................................................................................................... 8-23
Print DSN Message.......................................................................................................................... 8-23
Print E-mail Message Body ............................................................................................................. 8-24
E-Mail Subject/Text List................................................................................................................... 8-24
How to print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-24
Print sample ..................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6
8.6.1
Report printed for IP ..................................................................................................................... 8-25
Network Fax RX Error Report .......................................................................................................... 8-25
User Mode Settings
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
9.2.9
9.2.10
9.2.11
9.2.12
Menu trees in User mode ............................................................................................................... 9-3
One-Touch/User Box Registration..................................................................................................... 9-3
User Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Recalling or registering Scan/Fax programs...................................................................................... 9-6
One-Touch/User Box Registration ................................................................................................ 9-7
Displaying the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen ................................................................. 9-7
Address Book - E-Mail....................................................................................................................... 9-7
Address Book - User Box .................................................................................................................. 9-9
Address Book - Fax ......................................................................................................................... 9-10
Address Book - PC (SMB) ............................................................................................................... 9-12
Address Book - FTP......................................................................................................................... 9-14
Address Book - WebDAV................................................................................................................. 9-16
Address Book - IP Address Fax....................................................................................................... 9-18
Address Book - Internet Fax............................................................................................................ 9-19
Registering groups........................................................................................................................... 9-20
Registering E-mail setting subjects (E-mail/I-FAX) .......................................................................... 9-21
Registering an E-mail setting text (E-mail/I-FAX)............................................................................. 9-21
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-7
10
9.2.13
Registering a scan/fax program....................................................................................................... 9-22
Registering programs....................................................................................................................... 9-22
Check Job Set. ................................................................................................................................ 9-23
Delete ............................................................................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.14
9.2.15
9.2.16
9.2.17
Create User Box - Confidential User Box (G3) ................................................................................ 9-24
Create User Box - Bulletin Board User Box (G3) ............................................................................. 9-24
Create User Box - Relay User Box (G3)........................................................................................... 9-24
Limiting Access to Destinations - Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations......................................... 9-24
Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 9-24
Group ............................................................................................................................................... 9-25
Program ........................................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
User Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-26
Displaying the User Settings screen ................................................................................................ 9-26
Custom Display Settings - Scan/Fax Settings................................................................................. 9-26
Custom Display Settings - Fax Active Screen (G3/IP/I-FAX)........................................................... 9-27
Custom Display Settings - Search Option Settings......................................................................... 9-28
Scan/Fax Settings............................................................................................................................ 9-28
Administrator Mode Settings
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.1.7
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
Configuration before use ............................................................................................................. 10-3
E-mail ............................................................................................................................................... 10-3
User Box .......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
SMB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
FTP................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
G3 Fax.............................................................................................................................................. 10-3
Internet Fax ...................................................................................................................................... 10-4
IP Address Fax................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Menu tree in Administrator mode................................................................................................ 10-5
System Settings ............................................................................................................................... 10-5
Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 10-6
Security Settings .............................................................................................................................. 10-8
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV).......................................................... 10-9
Displaying the Administrator Settings screen.................................................................................. 10-9
System Settings - Restrict User Access .......................................................................................... 10-9
Restrict Access to Job Settings....................................................................................................... 10-9
Restrict Operation.......................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3.6
System Settings - Reset Setting - Job Reset - Next Job - Reset Data After Job ......................... 10-10
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Header/Footer Settings........................................................ 10-11
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting display ........................ 10-12
Security Settings - Security Details ............................................................................................... 10-12
Manual Destination Input ............................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
Administrator Settings (G3)........................................................................................................ 10-14
System Settings - Power Save Settings - Enter Power Save Mode.............................................. 10-14
System Settings - Output Settings - Print/Fax Output Settings - Fax........................................... 10-14
System Settings - Restrict User Access ........................................................................................ 10-15
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses ..................................... 10-15
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting.................................................................................... 10-15
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.6
10.4.7
10.4.8
10.4.9
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings .................................................................... 10-15
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting display ........................ 10-15
Fax Settings - Header Information................................................................................................. 10-16
Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position .......................................................................................... 10-17
Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting ........................................................................................... 10-18
Fax Settings - TX/RX Setting ......................................................................................................... 10-20
Contents-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4.10
Fax Settings - Function Settings.................................................................................................... 10-23
Function ON/OFF Settings............................................................................................................. 10-23
Memory RX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 10-24
Closed Network RX........................................................................................................................ 10-25
Forward TX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 10-26
Incomplete TX Hold ....................................................................................................................... 10-27
PC-Fax RX Settings ....................................................................................................................... 10-27
TSI User Box Setting...................................................................................................................... 10-28
10.4.11
10.4.12
10.4.13
10.4.14
Fax Settings - PBX Connection Setting......................................................................................... 10-29
Fax Settings - Report Settings....................................................................................................... 10-29
Fax Settings - Job Settings List..................................................................................................... 10-31
Fax Settings - Multi Line Settings .................................................................................................. 10-32
Line Parameter Setting .................................................................................................................. 10-32
Function Settings ........................................................................................................................... 10-33
Multi Line Settings ......................................................................................................................... 10-33
Sender Fax No. .............................................................................................................................. 10-33
10.4.15
Security Settings - Security Details ............................................................................................... 10-34
Manual Destination Input ............................................................................................................... 10-34
Restrict Fax TX............................................................................................................................... 10-34
Hide Personal Information ............................................................................................................. 10-34
Display Activity Log........................................................................................................................ 10-34
Initialize .......................................................................................................................................... 10-34
Job History Thumbnail Display ...................................................................................................... 10-34
Copy Guard.................................................................................................................................... 10-34
Password Copy.............................................................................................................................. 10-35
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX) .............................................................................................. 10-36
System Settings - Power Save Setting - Enter Power Save Mode................................................ 10-36
System Settings - Output Setting - Print/Fax Output Setting - Fax .............................................. 10-36
System Settings - Restrict User Access ........................................................................................ 10-36
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses ..................................... 10-36
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Change the "From" Address.................................................... 10-36
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting.................................................................................... 10-36
10.5.4
10.5.5
10.5.6
10.5.7
10.5.8
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings .................................................................... 10-36
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting display ........................ 10-36
Fax Settings - Header Information................................................................................................. 10-37
Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position .......................................................................................... 10-37
Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting (IP)..................................................................................... 10-37
Number of Redials ......................................................................................................................... 10-37
Redial Interval ................................................................................................................................ 10-37
10.5.9
10.5.10
Fax Settings - TX/RX Settings ....................................................................................................... 10-37
Fax Settings - Function Settings.................................................................................................... 10-37
Function ON/OFF Setting - Destination Check Display Function.................................................. 10-37
Memory RX Setting ........................................................................................................................ 10-37
10.5.11
Fax Settings - Report Settings....................................................................................................... 10-38
Activity Report................................................................................................................................ 10-38
TX Result Report............................................................................................................................ 10-38
Sequential TX Report ..................................................................................................................... 10-38
Broadcast Result Report................................................................................................................ 10-38
TX Result Report Check................................................................................................................. 10-38
Network Fax RX Error Report ........................................................................................................ 10-38
MDN Message (I-FAX).................................................................................................................... 10-39
DSN Message (I-FAX) .................................................................................................................... 10-39
Print E-mail Message Body (I-FAX)................................................................................................ 10-39
10.5.12
10.5.13
Fax Settings - Job Settings List..................................................................................................... 10-40
Fax Settings - Network Fax Settings ............................................................................................. 10-40
Black Compression Level .............................................................................................................. 10-40
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method ...................................................................... 10-40
Internet Fax Self RX Ability (I-FAX)................................................................................................. 10-41
Internet Fax Advanced Settings (I-FAX) ......................................................................................... 10-41
IP Address Fax Setting .................................................................................................................. 10-42
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-9
10.5.14
11
Security Settings - Security Details ............................................................................................... 10-43
Manual Destination Input ............................................................................................................... 10-43
Restrict Fax TX............................................................................................................................... 10-43
Hide Personal Information ............................................................................................................. 10-43
Display Activity Log........................................................................................................................ 10-43
Initialize .......................................................................................................................................... 10-43
Job History Thumbnail Display ...................................................................................................... 10-43
Copy Guard.................................................................................................................................... 10-43
Password Copy.............................................................................................................................. 10-43
Web Connection
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
How to use Web Connection ....................................................................................................... 11-3
Operating environment .................................................................................................................... 11-3
How to access ................................................................................................................................. 11-3
Cache function of Web browser ...................................................................................................... 11-4
For Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 11-4
For Netscape Navigator ................................................................................................................... 11-4
For Mozilla Firefox............................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.2
11.2.1
Logging in and logging out .......................................................................................................... 11-5
Login and logout flows..................................................................................................................... 11-5
When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 11-5
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................. 11-7
11.2.2
11.2.3
Logging out ...................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Logging in ........................................................................................................................................ 11-9
Login options ................................................................................................................................... 11-9
Logging in as a public user ............................................................................................................ 11-10
Logging in as a registered user...................................................................................................... 11-11
Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................. 11-12
Logging in as a User Box administrator......................................................................................... 11-13
11.3
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
11.4.4
11.4.5
11.4.6
11.5
11.5.1
11.5.2
11.5.3
11.5.4
11.5.5
11.5.6
11.5.7
11.5.8
11.5.9
11.5.10
Page Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 11-14
User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................. 11-16
Information ..................................................................................................................................... 11-16
Job ................................................................................................................................................. 11-17
User Box ........................................................................................................................................ 11-18
Direct Print ..................................................................................................................................... 11-19
Store Address ................................................................................................................................ 11-20
Customize ...................................................................................................................................... 11-21
Administrator Mode Overview ................................................................................................... 11-22
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 11-22
System Settings ............................................................................................................................. 11-23
Security .......................................................................................................................................... 11-24
User Authentication/Account Track ............................................................................................... 11-25
Network.......................................................................................................................................... 11-26
User Box ........................................................................................................................................ 11-28
Print Settings.................................................................................................................................. 11-29
Store Address ................................................................................................................................ 11-30
Fax Settings ................................................................................................................................... 11-31
Setting for each purpose ............................................................................................................... 11-32
Contents-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12
13
14
Troubleshooting for fax and scanning problems
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Cannot send faxes ........................................................................................................................ 12-3
G3 Fax.............................................................................................................................................. 12-3
Network fax or network scan sending ............................................................................................. 12-4
Cannot receive faxes .................................................................................................................... 12-5
G3 Fax.............................................................................................................................................. 12-5
Network Fax..................................................................................................................................... 12-6
Error messages displayed............................................................................................................ 12-7
G3 Fax.............................................................................................................................................. 12-7
If the HDD Ready indicator indicates an HDD malfunction ............................................................. 12-7
Network Fax Error Code .................................................................................................................. 12-8
Transmission system error code...................................................................................................... 12-8
Reception system error code........................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4
If "Contact your service representative" is displayed (Service Call)...................................... 12-10
Appendix
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
Product specifications.................................................................................................................. 13-3
Scanner functions ............................................................................................................................ 13-3
Fax function ..................................................................................................................................... 13-3
Tips ................................................................................................................................................. 13-4
Number of pages saved in memory................................................................................................. 13-4
Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer (Web service) ......................................... 13-4
Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer................................................................ 13-4
13.3
13.4
13.5
Scanner Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 13-5
Internet Fax Glossary.................................................................................................................. 13-10
Fax Glossary ................................................................................................................................ 13-11
Index
14.1
14.2
Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-3
Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Contents-11
Contents-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
1
Introduction
1.1
1
Welcome
1
Introduction
1.1
Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and
simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this
product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.
1.1.1
User's guides
Printed manual
Overview
Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.
User's guide DVD manuals
Overview
Copy Operations
This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
Enlarge Display Operations
This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanner functions
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
Print Operations
This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
Box Operations
This manual describes details on the boxed functions
using the hard disk.
• Saving data in User Boxes.
• Retrieving data from User Boxes.
• Transferring and printing data from User Boxes
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations
This manual describes details on transmitting
scanned data.
• Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User
Box, WebDAV and Web Service
• G3 Fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
Fax Driver Operations
This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
Network Administrator
This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using Web Connection.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
1-3
1
1.1.2
Welcome
1.1
User's guide DVD manuals
Overview
Advanced Function Operations
This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit
and by connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address function
User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first
time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting
operations, and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting
operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
1-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
1.2
1
Conventions used in this manual
1.2
Conventions used in this manual
1.2.1
Symbols used in this manual.
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
-
This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
-
This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0
This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are
prerequisite for a procedure.
1
This format number "1" represents the first step.
2
This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a
procedural instruction.
A procedural
operation is
illustrated.
%
This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
1-5
1
Conventions used in this manual
1.2
d Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[]
This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or computer screen, or power switch,
etc.
1.2.2
Document and paper indications
Paper size
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Paper indication
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).
1-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2
Before using the Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax
functions
2.1
2
2
Information
Before using the Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
functions
This section describes necessary information you should be aware of before using the fax and scan functions
of this machine.
2.1
Information
7 CAUTION
-
2.1.1
To turn the [Main power switch] off and on, first turn the main power off, and then on again after 10 or
more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
Transmission function
Function type
Using this machine, scanned images can be sent or received via network or telephone line. This User's Guide
introduces the following functions.
Functions
Transmission Options
Network scan function
•
•
•
•
•
•
E-Mail
FTP
SMB
User Box
WebDAV
Web Service
Fax function
•
•
Sending and receiving G3 fax
Polling
Network fax function
•
•
Internet Fax (I-FAX)
IP Address Fax
Notes on using fax functions (G3)
Reference
To use the fax function, the optional fax kit FK-502 is required.
Fax data cannot be sent/received in color with this machine.
This machine can connect to the following telephone lines.
Subscribed telephone lines (including facsimile communication networks)
PBX (Private Branch eXchange, 2-wire)
Check the following for the telephone line to be used.
You cannot connect a business phone as an external telephone.
If a digital dedicated line is multiplexed in an enterprise network, fax transmission speed may be limited,
or the Super G3 fax may not be available.
Communication error may occur on rare occasions due to the factory default setting. This is because the
multiplex device limits the frequency band of the line to the utmost limit based on the assumption that the
line is intended for voice communication. Also, these restrictions differ depending on the device that make
up the network. For details, contact your network administrator.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2-3
2
Information
2.1
Notes on using Network Fax
The following conditions are required to exist in order to use the Network Fax function.
The machine is connected to the network. (required)
The machine can be used over a TCP/IP network. First, connect the cable for connecting to the network.
For details, refer to page 4-3. In order to use this machine on a network, settings such as the IP address of
the machine must be specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Notes on using Internet Fax
The following describes the precautions for using the Internet Fax.
To use the Internet Fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details,
contact your service representative.
The following environment is required to use the Internet Fax function.
–
The machine is connected to the network, capable of E-mail communications.
–
The Internet FAX function is set to "ON" in "Network Fax Function Setting" of Administrator Settings.
When an E-mail message is sent, the attachment file may be broken depending on the network status.
Make sure the attachment file of the document is not broken after being sent.
Even if the transmission result screen or the result area of an activity report indicates "----", due to a
problem existing in an Internet pathway, E-Mail messages may not be delivered to the recipient. "----"
indicates that the E-mail message was successfully delivered to the server. If the machine receives a
message disposition notification (MDN), "OK" appears in the transmission result screen or the result
column of an activity report. To send or receive important data, use the G3 fax function.
d Reference
For details on "Network Fax Function Setting", refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Notes on using IP Address Fax
The following describes the precautions for using the IP Address Fax.
To use the IP Address Fax function, ask your service representative to configure settings. For details,
contact your service representative.
To use the IP Address Fax function, the optional fax kit FK-502 is required.
An extension line cannot be used for the IP Address Fax function.
2-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2.1
2.1.2
2
Information
User authentication
To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a
password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your
administrator.
Reference
If "Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error" in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user enters an
incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no longer be able
to use the machine. For details on unlocking restricted operations, contact your administrator.
If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login
procedure.
MFP authentication
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] or the [Access] key on the control panel.
External server authentication
Enter the user name, password and server name, and then press either [Login] or the [Access] key on the
control panel.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2-5
2
Information
2.1
Account Track
Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] or the [Access] key on the control panel.
Restriction on file name
There are following restrictions on file name.
Document data that is saved can be given a name.
The names can contain up to 30 characters.
The names are editable after being saved.
You can specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data.
If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements.
As an example, the document name "C50C-210102315230" is described.
Item
Description
S
This character indicates the mode when the document is saved.
C: Copy
S: Fax/Scan, Box
P: Print
50C-2
This represents the name of the device that
scanned the data. The factory default is "(product
name)". This name can be changed with "Device
Name" on "Administrator/Machine Setting" in Administrator Settings. Specify a name using up to 10
characters.
08102315230
This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day,
hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The
last digit is a serial number if the document is part
of a series of scans.
_0001
This indicates the page when multi-page data is
scanned. This numeral does not appear in "File
Name" screen; however, it is added automatically
as part of the name when the file is transmitted.
Consider this part when you name for FTP or other
transmission in which a server has restriction on receiving file names.
.TIF
This is the extension for the specified data format.
The characters do not appear beside "File Name",
but is added automatically as part of the name
when the file is transmitted.
Reference
"S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen.
2-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2.2
2
Overview
2.2
Overview
2.2.1
Available operations with Network scan function
"Scanning" refers to the operation of reading the image of an original fed through the ADF or placed on the
original glass. The scanning functions can be used to temporarily store the scan data on the internal memory
of the machine and transmit the data over the network.
E-Mail transmission
Scanned data can be sent to the specified E-mail address. Select destinations from the touch panel of this
machine, and send scanned data as an E-mail attachment.
Original
MFP
E-mail +
Scanned data
Receive by E-mail
Memory
SMTP server
POP server
Internet/Intranet
FTP transmission
Upload scanned data to the specified FTP server. Enter the FTP server address and login password from the
touch panel of this machine.
Data uploaded to the FTP server can be downloaded from a computer on the network.
Original
MFP
Scanned data
Download
Memory
FTP server
Internet/Intranet
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2-7
2
Overview
2.2
SMB transmission
Scanned data can be sent to a shared folder on a specified computer. Enter the intended host name, file path
and other information from the touch panel of this machine.
Original
MFP
Scanned data
Save in a shared folder
Memory
User Box filing
The scan data can be saved in a User Box created on the hard disk of this machine, allowing the data to be
reused. The file name can be entered from the touch panel of this machine when the data is saved.
In addition, received fax data can be saved in the User Box. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
MFP
Hard disk
2-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2.2
2
Overview
WebDAV transmission
Upload scanned data to the specified server. Enter the server address and login password from the touch
panel of this machine.
The data uploaded to the server can be downloaded from a computer on the network.
Original
MFP
Scanned data
Download
Memory
Server
Internet/Intranet
Web Service
If the driver is installed to a computer (Windows Vista) on the network while the computer recognizes this
machine, scan operation can be commanded from the computer, and data can be scanned using this
machine depending on the purpose and sent to the computer.
Original
Scan command
Windows Vista
Scanned data
Reference
This function is not available if the optional Image controller IC-412 is installed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2-9
2
2.2.2
Overview
2.2
Available operations with fax function
Sending/receiving G3 fax
G3 fax can be sent or received. Destinations can be selected from the touch panel of this machine for
broadcast transmission. Also, some of the edit functions that are available for Scan can be added when
sending a fax.
Send
Receive
Polling
By sending a polling command, original data can be received from the sender's fax machine (Polling RX), and
also, original data to be sent with sender's command can be registered beforehand (Polling TX). For polling
TX, data can be saved either in the Polling Transmission User Box or Bulletin Board User Box.
Receive
Send
Browse
Bulletin board
Polling
Register
2-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2.2
2.2.3
2
Overview
Available operations with Network function
Internet Fax
Scanned data will be sent and received as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) via intranet (in-house network)
or Internet. Because a communication is performed over an intranet or the Internet, related costs can be
much lower than those required for sending a typical fax. Specify the E-mail address of the destination in
order to send data.
Original
E-mail + TIFF
type attachment
Intranet/
Internet
Receive by
E-mail
Receive by
Internet Fax
SMTP
server
POP
server
IP Address Fax
IP Address Fax means FAX that is available on the IP network. To send scanned data, specify any of the IP
address, host name or E-mail address of the recipient.
IP Address Fax is different from G3 fax or Internet Fax in the following aspects.
To send and receive image data, use the SMTP protocol.
This function is available via the intranet (in-house network) only.
It does not require a mail server as is required by Internet Fax.
Fax can be sent or received in color. (Only the differences from G3 fax)
- Send a fax by specifying the IP address or host name of the recipient.
SMTP
Intranet
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
2-11
2
2-12
Overview
2.2
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3
Control Panel/Liquid Crystal
Display
3.1
3
3
Control panel
Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
This section explains the functions of the control panel and liquid crystal display (touch panel) used to operate
this machine.
3.1
Control panel
Use the control panel for the fax/scan operation. The following describes the buttons and switches of the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
22
21
5
20
6
19
7
18
17
8
16
9
15
14 13 12
No.
11 10
Name
Description
1
Touch panel
Various screens and messages are displayed.
Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel.
2
Power indicator
Lights up in green when the machine is turned on
with the main power switch.
3
[Sub power switch]
Press to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned
off, the machine enters an energy conservation
state.
4
[Power Save]
Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the
[Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch
panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode,
press the [Power Save] key again.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-3
3
Control panel
No.
3-4
3.1
Name
Description
5
[Mode Memory]
Press to register (store) the desired copy/scan
settings as a program or to recall a registered
copy/scan program.
6
[Utility/Counter]
Press to display the Utility screen and the Meter
Count screen.
7
[Reset]
Press to clear all settings (except programmed
settings) entered using the control panel and
touch panel.
8
[Interrupt]
Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine
is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message
"Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch
panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again.
9
[Stop]
Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation.
10
[Proof Copy]
Press to print a single proof copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies. You can
check the finishing state on the touch panel by
pressing this key before scanning or copying.
11
[Start]
Press to start scanning. When this machine is
ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on
the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on
the [Start] key lights up in orange, scan operation
cannot be started.
When a job is temporarily stopped, press this key
to restart the job.
12
Data indicator
Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue when data is being printed.
13
[C] (Clear)
Press to erase a value (such as the number of
copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the
keypad.
14
Keypad
Use to enter the number of copies to be produced,
Use to enter the zoom ratio.
Use to enter the various settings.
15
[Guidance]
Press to display the Guidance screen. From this
screen, you can view descriptions of the various
functions and details of operations.
16
[Enlarge Display]
Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use
Authentication Manager for authentication, the
Enlarge Display screen is not available.
17
[Accessibility]
Press to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions.
18
[Access]
If user authentication and account track settings
have been applied, press this key after entering
the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press
this key to log off from the machine as well.
19
[Brightness] dial
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
20
[User Box]
Press to enter User Box mode.
While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.1
3
Control panel
No.
Name
Description
21
[Fax/Scan]
Press to enter Fax/Scan mode.
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green.
22
[Copy]
Press to enter Copy mode. (The machine is in
Copy mode in default.)
While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator
on the [Copy] key lights up in green. For details,
refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
7 CAUTION
-
Do not apply extreme pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting
damage to the touch panel. When operating on the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel
with force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-5
3
Touch panel
3.2
Touch panel
3.2.1
Screen component
3.2
1
4
2
3
5
3-6
No.
Name
Description
1
Message display area
Displays the status of the machine and details on
operations.
2
Functions/settings display area
Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens
containing various functions. Use this area to
configure various functions. Press a tab or button
to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings.
3
Icon display area
Displays icons indicating the status of jobs and
the machines.
4
Left panel
Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to
display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and
[Check Job] to display the result of the specified
settings.
For details on the display and description of the
left panel, refer to page 3-9.
5
Toner supply indicators
These indicators show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and
black (K).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
Icons that appear in the touch panel
Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be
displayed.
Icon
Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine,
regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that an error occurred during an image
stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan
operation.
Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen has been closed while a
warning occurs, press this button to display the
warning screen again.
Appears when there is a message indicating that
consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the
message, and then perform the replacement or
maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection
to the POP server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper
tray.
If the optional image controller is installed, press
this icon to display the setting screen for the image
controller.
Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled.
Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine.
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has
been connected to this machine, therefore, USB
connection is not enabled.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-7
3
3.2.2
Touch panel
3.2
Difference of screen display with/without optional devices
The information displayed on the screen varies depending on whether the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed
or not.
If the fax kit FK-502 is not installed
Fax destinations or functions related to fax operation are not displayed.
If the fax kit FK-502 is installed
[Off-Hook] is displayed to enable you to dial in the off-hook mode. In addition, the [Direct Input] tab and the
Communication Settings screen allow you to configure settings related to fax transmission.
3-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3.2.3
3
Touch panel
Display and operation of Left panel
In the left panel of the touch panel, buttons are displayed that allows you to check the status of jobs and
settings of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in Scan/Fax mode.
1
2
No.
Name
Description
1
[Job List]
Allows you to check the job currently being performed and the job log.
2
[Check Job]
Allows you to check information of the selected
User Box, and various settings of the scan, print
and transmission functions.
Job List
The operation command such as saving data to a User Box, or printing and sending saved documents is
called a job. Press [Job List] to display the job currently being performed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-9
3
Touch panel
3.2
Job List - Delete
You can delete the job in process and cancel the operation. Select the job you want to delete from the job
list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job.
Job List - Job Details
Press [Job Details] to view the list of the Current Jobs and Job History in the right side area. There are the
following four types of jobs.
3-10
Item
Description
[Print]
Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, and
received faxes.
[Send]
Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs.
[Receive]
Lists fax reception jobs.
[Save]
Lists jobs for saving documents in User Boxes.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
<Current Jobs of [Print]>
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Status: The status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory) is displayed.
Document Name: File name being printed.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Delete]
Press to delete the selected job.
[Increase Priority]
Change the priority of the job.
• If you set Change Job Priority in Administrator
Settings is to "Restrict", you cannot specify the
output priority of the jobs.
• If the setting is specified so that the current
print job can be interrupted, it is interrupted and
printing of the higher priority job begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically
once printing for the job given priority is finished.
[Release Held Job]
Change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job.
[Check Job Set.]
Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [
Back] or [Forward
]
to check the settings.
[Detail]
Pressing this button allows you to check the registration source/user name, document name, output
tray, stored time, number of document pages and
number of copies for the selected job. Press [Delete] to delete the job.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-11
3
Touch panel
3.2
<Job History of [Print]>
Displays the history of printed jobs.
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Document Name: File name being printed.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by
user/part of mode cancelled).
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display each job type.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the job result, error details,
registration source/user name, document name,
output tray, stored time, number of document pages and number of copies for the selected job.
Reference
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.
d Reference
For details on [Job History Thumbnail Display], refer to page 10-34.
3-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
<Current Jobs of [Send]>
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
Address Type: Destination type (including fax, EMail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN).
Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial).
Destination: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
[
]
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
[Timer TX Job]
Displays the status of the reserved transmission in
the memory. Press [Delete] to delete the job.
[L1][L2]
Displays if 2 units of the optional fax kit FK-502 are
installed. It displays the list for each selected line.
[Delete]
Press to delete the selected job.
[Redial]
Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting
To Redial", to perform redialing.
[Check Job Set.]
Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [
Back] or [Forward
]
to check the settings.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the status, the registration
source/user name, document name, destination
type, destination, stored time, transmission,
number of document pages and external server information for the selected job. Press [Delete] to delete the job.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
• The external server information that is available
by pressing [Detail] appears only when using
external server authentication.
• "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via
Web service.
• [Communication] is displayed only when the
destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address
fax.
][
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-13
3
Touch panel
3.2
<Job History of [Send]>
Displays the history of the jobs sent by fax or scan.
The job that is transferred or relayed to another device upon reception of fax data, also appears in the Job
History of [Send].
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
Address Type: Destination type (including fax, EMail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN).
Destination: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by
user).
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display each job type.
[Comm. List]
Displays Scan List, Fax TX List, and Fax RX List.
You can print activity reports, transmission reports
and reception reports in respective list screens.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination
type, stored time, transmission, number of original
pages and external server information for the selected job.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
• The external server information that is available
by pressing [Detail] appears only when using
external server authentication.
• "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via
Web service.
• [Communication] is displayed only when the
destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address
fax.
Reference
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.
3-14
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
<Current Jobs of [Receive]>
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Status: The status of the job (receiving/dialing
(Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print
error/saving to memory).
Document Name: The name of the received or
saved document.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: The number of original pages that were received.
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Delete]
Press to delete the selected job.
[Redial]
Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting
To Redial", to perform redialing.
[Forward]
Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in
the address book or by entering directly.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the registration source/user
name, file name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, and number of original pages for the selected job. Press [Delete] to delete the job.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-15
3
Touch panel
3.2
<Job History of [Receive]>
Displays the history of fax transmission (received/transferred/relayed) jobs.
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Document Name: The name of the received or
saved document.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (Job
Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User/Reset Modes).
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display each job type.
[Comm. List]
Displays Scan List, Fax TX List, and Fax RX List.
You can print activity reports, transmission reports
and reception reports in respective list screens.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the job result, error details,
registration source/user name, file name, output
tray, stored time, and number of original pages for
the selected job.
Reference
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.
<Current Jobs of [Save]>
3-16
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Status: The status of the job (receiving, saving to
memory, deleting).
Document Name: The name of the saved document.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Delete]
Press to delete the selected job.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the registration source/user
name, file name, User Box, stored time, and
number of original pages for the selected job.
Press [Delete] to delete the job.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
<Job History of [Save]>
A list of the documents saved in the User Box.
The job that is received with the memory reception or confidential reception functions also appears in the Job
History of [Save].
Item
Description
List items
No.: Job identification number assigned when the
job is queued
User Name: The user name or user name/account
name of the user who stored the document.
Document Name: The name of the saved document.
• If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users.
• The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored: The time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (Job
Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User/Reset Modes).
[
When there are more jobs than the number that can
be displayed at one time (seven), press these buttons to display other pages.
][
]
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display each job type.
[Comm. List]
Displays Scan List, Fax TX List, and Fax RX List.
You can print activity reports, transmission reports
and reception reports in respective list screens.
[Detail]
Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination
User Box, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job.
Reference
When [Job History Thumbnail Display] is set to [ON] in the setting menu, if a history is selected from the
list, the image in the first page is displayed in the area on the left.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-17
3
Touch panel
3.2
Check Job - Check Job Settings
Press [Check Job]. The [Check Job Settings] is displayed.
Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings.
Destination Setting
Check Scan Settings
Check Original Settings
Communication Settings
Check E-Mail Settings
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings
Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine.
To add the directly entered address to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store
Address].
To check the detailed information of the destination displayed, select a destination, and press [Details].
To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete].
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Scan Settings
You can check the details of scan settings (basic setting, scan setting and application setting). Press either
[
Back] or [Forward
] to check.
3-18
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3.2
3
Touch panel
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Original Settings
You can check the original settings
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings
You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [
check.
Back] or [Forward
] to
Check Job - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings
You can check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
3-19
3
3-20
Touch panel
3.2
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4
Registering the basic
information
4.1
4
4
To begin operation
Registering the basic information
This section explains the necessary settings and registrations before using the fax and scan functions of this
machine.
4.1
To begin operation
The following registrations are required in order to use this machine.
4.1.1
Environment and device requirements
The following environment and devices must be prepared to use various functions of this machine.
Functions
Environment and device
Network scan function
•
•
Connection to network
Network settings
G3 fax function
•
•
Optional fax kit FK-502 installed
Connection of modular cable
Internet Fax
•
•
Connection to network
Network settings
IP Address Fax
•
•
•
Optional fax kit FK-502 installed
Connection to network
Network settings
Network fax function
4.1.2
Network connection and settings
Connection to the network and the network settings are required to use the function of this machine that
sends image data over the network, such as the Network Scan and Network Fax functions.
Connection to network
Connect a UTP cable (category 5 or later recommended) connected to the network to the Ethernet connector
on the machine.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4-3
4
To begin operation
4.1
Network settings
An IP address must be assigned to the machine and settings, such as the SMTP server, must be specified in
order to use the machine on the network. For the detailed procedure, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Administrator]".
Specifying an E-mail address for this machine
An E-mail address must be registered to this machine to send scanned data via E-mail or to use the Internet
Fax function. This E-mail address is used for sending/receiving data. It is recommended that the E-mail
address registered for the administrator be used.
If the E-mail address registered for the administrator is not specified, the sender's E-mail address must be
entered for each Scan to E-mail operation. Note that Scan to E-mail operations are not possible if a From
address is not entered.
Reference
If User Authentication is enabled, the E-mail address specified for each user will be From address.
d Reference
For details on setting the E-mail address for this machine, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
4.1.3
Connection of modular cable
To send/receive G3 fax that use the telephone line, connect the modular cable to this machine. To use the
G3 fax function, the optional fax kit FK-502 must be installed onto the machine. To use two telephone lines,
one more optional fax kit FK-502 must be installed onto the machine. In this case, two modular cables must
be connected.
Connect one end of the modular cable to the telephone adapter, and the other end to the predetermined
connector of this machine. For details on the connector location, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy
Operations]".
4-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4.2
4.2
Store Address
4
Store Address
The destinations (recipients) for fax or scan data can be registered in either of the following ways.
Using the touch panel of the machine
Using Web Connection from a computer on the network
4.2.1
Address Book
The following types of one-touch destinations can be registered. For details on address book registration,
refer to page 9-3.
E-Mail
User Box
Fax
PC (SMB)
FTP
WebDAV
IP Address Fax
Internet fax transmission
Reference
Web service destinations cannot be registered with an address book. Enter directly the Web service
destination instead.
4.2.2
Group
Multiple destination addresses can be grouped, and registered as a Group. This is convenient for sending
data to multiple destinations simultaneously.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4-5
4
4.3
Optional settings
4.3
Optional settings
The following settings can be configured as necessary.
Fax/Scan programs
The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single program. This is convenient for
frequently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions. Use the touch panel of the
machine to configure the settings.
d Reference
For details, refer to page 9-22.
Custom display settings
Configure the settings of the screen that appears when [Fax/Scan] in the control panel is pressed.
d Reference
For details, refer to page 9-26.
4-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4.4
4.4
Using the Web service
4
Using the Web service
Allows you to command scan operations from the computer (Windows Vista) on the network, and scan data
for a purpose and send it to the computer. The following explains the presetting required for the computer.
4.4.1
Settings required to use the Web service
The following settings are required to use the Web service.
Installing the driver program of this machine to a computer
Configuring settings to use the Web service on this machine
Reference
The Web service settings on this machine are configured in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
4.4.2
Installing the driver program of this machine to a computer
Check before installation
Before installing the driver program, make sure "Network discovery" is turned on in [Control Panel] - [Network
and Sharing Center].
Installation procedure
1
From the [Start] button, select [Network].
Devices connected to the network appear.
2
Right-click the scanner icon representing this machine, and select [Install].
% Depending on the settings on the computer, the UAC (User Account Control) dialog box may
appear. Check the details, and continue.
% If both of the scan and printer functions of the Web service are enabled on the machine, the machine
is represented by the printer icon.
% The driver software is automatically installed. When the confirmation dialog box appear, click
[Close].
3
Select [Web Service] on the control panel of this machine, to ensure that the connection to the
computer is established.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
4-7
4
4-8
Using the Web service
4.4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5
Sending
5.1
5
5
Operation flow
Sending
This section describes the procedure for sending fax and scanned data, and available functions.
5.1
Operation flow
5.1.1
Scan/Network Fax
The following describes the operation flow for sending scanned data and for using Network Fax function.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Specify the destination.
Address Book (p. 5-21)
Direct Input (p. 5-25)
Job History (p. 5-32)
Address Search (p. 5-33)
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Settings (p. 5-55)
and Communication Settings (p. 5-58).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-3
5
Operation flow
5.1
Load the original.
To check the advanced preview, press the [Proof
Copy] key. (p. 5-11)
Press the [Start] key.
Reference
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Password copy] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.
5-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.1
5.1.2
5
Operation flow
G3 fax
The following describes the operation flow for using G3 fax function.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Specify the destination.
Address Book (p. 5-21)
Direct Input (p. 5-25)
Job History (p. 5-32)
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Settings (p. 5-55)
and Communication Settings (p. 5-58).
Load the original.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-5
5
Operation flow
5.1
To check the advanced preview, press the [Proof
Copy] key. (p. 5-11)
Press the [Start] key.
Reference
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Password copy] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.
5-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.1
5.1.3
Operation flow
5
Recalling a program
The following describes the procedure to use the scan/fax program.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
Select a program, and press [OK].
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Settings (p. 5-55)
and Communication Settings (p. 5-58).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-7
5
Operation flow
5.1
Load the original.
To check the advanced preview, press the [Proof
Copy] key. (p. 5-11)
Press the [Start] key.
Reference
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Password copy] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.
d Reference
For the description and procedure on registering a program, refer to page 9-22.
5-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.1
5.1.4
5
Operation flow
Broadcasting
The following describes the procedure for sending a fax to multiple destinations simultaneously.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Specify multiple destinations.
Address Book (p. 5-21)
Direct Input (p. 5-25)
Job History (p. 5-32)
Address Search (p. 5-33)
Configure Scan Settings (p. 5-36), Original Settings (p. 5-55)
and Communication Settings (p. 5-58).
Load the original.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-9
5
Operation flow
5.1
To check the advanced preview, press the [Proof
Copy] key. (p. 5-11)
Press the [Start] key.
Reference
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Password copy] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, when scanning an original with a password embedded, a message prompting
you to enter a password appears. Press [Password], enter the password, and then press [OK]. On the
screen that reappears, press [Begin Authentication] to start sending.
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] is set to [Yes] in
Administrator Settings, you cannot send an original with copy guard patterns embedded.
5-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.2
5.2
5
Using the advanced preview
Using the advanced preview
Loading the original in the fax or scan mode and entering the address allows you to preview the finishing
image on the control panel by pressing the [Proof Copy] key. In the Preview screen, the orientation of the
scanned original can be checked or the settings can be changed.
Reference
If Encryption is selected, you cannot display the preview image.
5.2.1
Preview screen
Preview - View Pages
Displays the scanned image.
Item
Description
[Prev. Page]/[Next Page]
If the saved document contains multiple pages,
use these buttons to switch the display to another
page.
Zoom
Press either of [ ]/[ ] to change the display size
to check the details of the document. Each time
pressing [ ], the display size changes to 2 times,
4 times and 8 times of the full size display in this order. In the enlarged display mode, use the scroll
bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion of the document.
Page Rotation
[Rotate current page]: Rotates the page that is currently displayed by 180 degrees.
[Select page(s) to rotate]: Displays if the saved document contains multiple pages. The list view of the
scanned pages appears, allowing you to specify
the page that you want to rotate by 180 degrees. In
the list view of the scanned pages, the following
operations can be selected.
[Select Odd]: Rotates images of only the odd numbered pages by 180 degrees.
[Select Even]: Rotates images of only the even
numbered pages by 180 degrees.
[Select All]: Rotates images in all pages by 180 degrees.
[View Finishing]
Displays icons in a preview image when TX Stamp
is selected. If [View Finishing] is canceled, only the
image appears while icons and text are hidden.
[Change Setting]
Change some of the settings you have configured
prior to scanning the original. For details, refer to
page 5-12.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-11
5
Using the advanced preview
5.2
Reference
Select a page directly to rotate the image of the selected page by 180 degrees.
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting
Change the following settings you have configured prior to scanning the original.
The changes apply to the subsequent pages of the originals to be scanned.
Item
Description
Basic - Document
Select whether the original is 1-sided or 2-sided. If
the "Cover+2-Sided" setting is enabled, [Cover+2Sided] appears as well.
Basic - Binding Position
Allows you to select this item if the destination type
is any of E-mail, User Box, FTP, PC (SMB) or WebDAV, and if the Book Copy function is not selected.
Basic - Original Size
Select if the "Mixed Original" setting is enabled.
Application - Frame Erase
Select to erase document frames.
Preview - View Status
Determine whether to scan subsequent pages or not.
5-12
Item
Description
[Finish]
To scan subsequent pages of the originals currently shown, make sure [Finish] is not selected.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.2
5.2.2
Using the advanced preview
5
Sending with the advanced preview
The following describes the procedure after the original is loaded. For details on the general flow for sending
fax and scanned data, refer to page 5-3.
Sending with Advanced Preview
1
Load the original.
2
Specify the destination.
3
Press the [Proof Copy] key.
4
Select the original direction.
% On the original glass
% On the ADF
% If [Advanced Preview Setting] - [Original direction setting display] is set to [OFF] in Administrator
Settings, the screen for specifying the direction in which the original is loaded does not appear. For
details on [Original direction setting display], refer to page 10-12.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-13
5
Using the advanced preview
5
5.2
Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned, and the Preview screen appears.
6
Check the preview image, and rotate the image or change settings as needed.
% To scan subsequent page, press the [View Status] tab, cancel [Finish], and load the original.
7
Press the [Start] key.
Transmission begins.
5-14
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.3
5.3
Fax/scan mode menu tree
5
Fax/scan mode menu tree
The following describes the screen components and settings of the functions available in Fax/scan mode.
[Address Book] tab
The following settings can be configured with the [Address Book] tab.(page 5-21)
First level
Search (p. 5-22)
Scan Settings (p. 5-36)
Original Settings (p. 5-55)
Communication Settings (p. 5-58)
[Direct Input] tab
The following settings can be configured with the [Direct Input] tab.(page 5-25)
First level
Fax (p. 5-25)
E-Mail (p. 5-25)
User Box (p. 5-26)
Internet Fax (p. 5-26)
IP Address Fax (p. 5-27)
PC (SMB) (p. 5-28)
FTP (p. 5-29)
WebDAV (p. 5-30)
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-15
5
Fax/scan mode menu tree
5.3
First level
Web Service (p. 5-31)
Scan Settings (p. 5-36)
Original Settings (p. 5-55)
Communication Settings (p. 5-58)
[Job History] tab
The following settings can be configured with the [Job History] tab.(page 5-32)
First level
Job History
Scan Settings (p. 5-36)
Original Settings (p. 5-55)
Communication Settings (p. 5-58)
[Address Search] tab
The following settings can be configured with the [Address Search] tab.(page 5-33)
First level
Search (p. 5-33)
Advanced Search (p. 5-33)
Scan Settings (p. 5-36)
Original Settings (p. 5-55)
Communication Settings (p. 5-58)
5-16
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.3
5
Fax/scan mode menu tree
Off-Hook
(page 5-35)
[Scan Settings]
The following settings can be configured with the [Scan Settings] tab.(page 5-36)
First level
Second level
Third level
Fourth level
Fifth level
Original Type (p. 5-36)
Simplex/Duplex (p. 5-37)
Resolution (p. 5-37)
File Type (p. 5-38)
File Type (p. 5-38)
Scan Setting (p. 5-39)
Encryption (p. 5-40)
Stamp Composition (p. 5-41)
Outline PDF (page p. 5-42)
Density (p. 5-42)
Color (p. 5-43)
Scan Size (p. 5-44)
Image Adjustment
Background Removal (p. 5-45)
Sharpness (p. 5-46)
Application
Frame Erase (p. 5-46)
Book Copy (p. 5-47)
Annotation (p. 5-49)
Stamp/Composition
Date/Time
(p. 5-49)
Date Format
Time Format
Pages
Print Position
Text Details
Text Color
Text Size
Text Type
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-17
5
Fax/scan mode menu tree
First level
Second level
Third level
Fourth level
Application
Stamp/Composition
Page Number
(p. 5-50)
Starting Page Number
5.3
Fifth level
Starting Chapter Number
Page Number Type
Print Position
Text Details
Text Color
Text Size
Text Type
Stamp (p. 5-51)
Stamp Type/Preset Stamps
Pages
Text Size
Text Color
Print Position
Header/Footer
(p. 5-51)
Send & Print
(p. 5-52)
Recall Header/Footer
Check/Change Temporarily
Copies
Simplex/Duplex
Staple
TX Stamp (p. 5-53)
Document Name (p. 5-54)
Separate Scan (p. 5-54)
[Original Settings]
The following settings can be configured with the [Original Settings] tab.(page 5-55)
First level
Second level
Third level
Special Original
Mixed Original (p. 5-55)
Fourth level
Z-Folded Original (p. 5-55)
Long Original (p. 5-55)
Direction Settings
Original Direction (p. 5-55)
Binding Position (p. 5-56)
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) (p. 5-56)
Despeckle (p. 5-57)
5-18
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.3
5
Fax/scan mode menu tree
[Communication Settings]
The following settings can be configured with the [Communication Settings] tab.(page 5-58)
First level
Second level
Third level
Line Settings
(p. 5-58)
Overseas TX (p. 5-58)
Fourth level
ECM OFF (p. 5-58)
V34 OFF (p. 5-59)
Check Dest. & Send (p. 5-59)
Select Line (p. 5-59)
E-Mail Settings
(p. 5-59)
Document Name (p. 5-59)
Subject (p. 5-60)
From (p. 5-60)
Body (p. 5-60)
URL Notification Setting (p. 5-61)
Communication
Method Settings
(p. 5-62)
Quick Memory TX (p. 5-62)
Polling RX
Normal (p. 5-63)
Bulletin (p. 5-63)
Timer TX (p. 5-64)
Password TX (p. 5-64)
Polling TX
Normal (p. 5-65)
Bulletin (p. 5-66)
F-Code TX
(p. 5-67)
SUB Address
Password
E-Mail Encryption (p. 5-67)
Digital Signature (p. 5-67)
Fax Header Settings (p. 5-68)
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-19
5
Fax/Scan initial screen
5.4
Fax/Scan initial screen
5.4.1
Description of screen components
5.4
Press [Fax/Scan] to display the following screen.
1
2
6
3
7
4
5
8
No.
Item
Description
Reference
1
[Address Book]
Press to select the recipient from the pre-registered
destinations.
p. 5-21
2
[Direct Input]
Press to directly enter unregistered destinations.
p. 5-25
3
[Job History]
Select the desired one from the destination history.
p. 5-32
4
[Address Search]
Press this button to search a destination registered on
the LDAP server.
p. 5-33
5
[Off-Hook]
Press this button to put the machine into the off hook
state ready for dialing.
p. 5-35
6
[Scan Settings]
Allows you to configure detailed settings for scanning
the document.
p. 5-36
7
[Original Settings]
Allows you to configure the detailed settings for the
original type and original direction.
p. 5-55
8
[Communication Settings]
Press to configure communication settings.
p. 5-58
Reference
If manual destination input is restricted in "Security Settings" in Administrator Settings, the [Direct Input]
tab is not displayed.
If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", [Off-Hook] is not displayed. For details on the Confirm Address
function, refer to page 10-23.
For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]" - "LDAP
setting".
The display position for each tab varies depending on the User Settings. For details, refer to page 9-26.
5-20
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.5
5.5
Address Book
5
Address Book
Allows you to select a registered address.
Me (Scan to Me)
If User Authentication is selected, the [Me] address is displayed in [Address Book]. Pressing the displayed
[Me] address allows you to easily send scan data to your E-mail address (E-mail address of user registration
information).
[Me] is
displayed.
Reference
[Me] appears in the [Address Book] tab if "Default Address Book" in the User Settings is set to "Index".
d Reference
For details on setting this function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-21
5
Address Book
5.5
Home (Scan to Home)
If Active Directory is used for user authentication, press [Home] that appears on the touch panel to allow you
to easily send scanned data to your own Home folder.
To do so, set "Scan to Home Settings" to "Enable" in Administrator Settings.
[Home] is
displayed.
d Reference
For details on setting this function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
5.5.1
Group
The destinations registered as groups appear.
5.5.2
Search
You can search for transmission destinations. There are following methods to search for the registered
destinations.
Address Type
This function enables you to search by the destination type configured when registered destination.
d Reference
For details, refer to page 9-26.
For details on address book registration, refer to page 9-7.
5-22
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.5
5
Address Book
The [Address Type] is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to "Index" in [User
Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.
[Address Type] is
displayed.
Index
Displays the destinations based on the index that was specified when the destination was registered.
d Reference
For details, refer to page 9-26.
For details on address book registration, refer to page 9-7.
The [Index] is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to "Address Type" in [User
Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu.
[Index] is
displayed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-23
5
Address Book
5.5
Detail Search
Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name]
or [Address], and enter an index.
Search Option
In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the option you want to add
to the search conditions, then press [OK].
Reference
To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use
"Search Option Settings" in the setting menu. For details, refer to page 9-28.
5-24
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.6
5.6
Direct Input
5
Direct Input
Directly enter to specify the destination not registered.
5.6.1
Fax
Enter the fax number by using the keypad or the panel buttons.
After you press [OK], the screen to enter the fax number appears again if "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to ON.
Enter the fax number, and then press [Send].
d Reference
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-23.
5.6.2
E-mail
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-25
5
5.6.3
Direct Input
5.6
User Box
Select the User Box type, and then select the User Box.
d Reference
For details on using the saved data in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
5.6.4
Internet Fax
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
Receiver RX Ability
Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. Multiple receivable settings can be
selected.
5-26
Item
Description
Compression Type
Select from JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH.
The compression ratio is higher in JPEG, MMR, MR and MH in this order. The
higher the compression ratio is, the shorter the transmission time. However,
the recipient's machine may not have capability to receive such compression
type. Select the compression type receivable on the receiver side.
Paper Size
Select from A3, B4 or A4.
Resolution
Select from 600 e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi
(Fine) or 200e100 dpi (Standard).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.6
5.6.5
Direct Input
5
IP Address Fax
Enter the destination of IP Address Fax.
Address
Enter any of the IP address, host name or E-mail address of the destination.
The entry methods are as follows:
For IP address:
Directly specify the IP address of the destination.
For host name on network:
Specify the host name of the destination.
For E-mail address format (1):
Use the E-mail address format.
Entry examples:
IPv4 address format: ipaddrfax@[192.168.0.101]
IPv6 address format: ipaddrfax@[IPv6:2004:2740:1003:1:250:70ff:fe00:1567]
–
To use the E-mail address format, enclose the IP address following the 'at' mark (@) in brackets [ ].
–
To use the IPv6 address format, enter "IPv6" just after the left bracket "[".
For E-mail address format (2):
Entry example: ipaddrfax@test.local
–
"test.local" following the 'at' mark (@) indicates a domain name of the local machine, which is not a
domain name used in an E-mail address.
–
To use the E-mail address format (2), specify the DNS server that enables you to resolve the domain
name of the local machine.
Port Number
Enter the port number to be used for transmission using the keypad. (Range: 1 to 65535)
Destination Machine Type
Select [Color] when the machine type of the destination is set to Color.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-27
5
5.6.6
Direct Input
5.6
PC (SMB)
Enter the PC (SMB) address.
Host Name
Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination with the panel.
File Path
Enter the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters with the panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.
Password
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.
Reference
You can check the folder configuration on the destination computer. You can directly specify the destination
folder if necessary.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
5-28
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.6
5.6.7
5
Direct Input
FTP
Enter the PC (FTP) address.
Host Name
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.
File Path
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel. To enter the text "anonymous", press [Anonymous].
Password
Enter the login password.
Detailed Settings
Press to configure the more detailed settings.
Item
Description
Port Number
Enter the port number.
PASV
Specify whether to use the PASV mode.
Proxy
Specify whether to use a proxy server.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-29
5
5.6.8
Direct Input
5.6
WebDAV
Enter the WebDAV address.
Host Name
Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel.
File Path
Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel.
User Name
Enter the login user name in the touch panel.
Password
Enter the login user password in the touch panel.
Detailed Settings
Press to configure the more detailed settings.
Item
Description
Port Number
Enter the port number.
Proxy
Specify whether to use a proxy server.
SSL Settings
Specify whether to use SSL for sending.
Next Destination
Press this button to continuously specify another destination.
5-30
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.6
5.6.9
Direct Input
5
Web Service
Send scanned data to a computer previously registered in the network.
The computers on the network, in which this machine is designated as the Web service scanner, appear as
the destinations. Select the destination.
d Reference
For the settings you must configure in advance, refer to page 4-7.
Data can be scanned and saved by sending command to this machine from the computer. For the detailed
procedure, refer to page 13-4.
Detail
Displays the destination name and URL.
Search
Enter a keyword that is included in the desired destination name with the panel, and search for destination.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-31
5
5.7
Job History
5.7
Job History
Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select
destinations from this history.
The previously sent destination history remains.
Press one or multiple addresses from the history list.
Reference
If you use a Web service for sending, the address is not displayed in the history.
Name
When you use the address book for sending, [Name] is displayed in the job history. If you press [Name],
"Address"in the job history changes to "Name", and the registered name appears.
5-32
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.8
Address Search
5.8
Address Search
5.8.1
Search
5
Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for matching address in the specified LDAP server.
5.8.2
Advanced Search
Specify multiple search criteria to search for the desired address.
Name
Enter the name in the touch panel.
E-mail Addr.
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number in the touch panel.
Last Name
Enter the last name in the touch panel.
First Name
Enter the first name in the touch panel.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-33
5
Address Search
5.8
City
Enter the city name in the touch panel.
Company Name
Enter the company name in the touch panel.
Department
Enter the department in the touch panel.
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH
Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH.
5-34
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.9
5.9
Off-Hook (G3)
5
Off-Hook (G3)
Use this button to manually send a fax.
Reference
Memory transmission can not be used in combination with the off-hook function.
If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", the off-hook function cannot be used.
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] or [Password copy]
is set to [Yes] in Administrator Settings, [Off-hook] is not displayed.
Manual transmission
Load the original, and configure the scan setting as needed. Press [Off-Hook] to turn into the on-hook state,
and the screen appears to select the recipient.
Press [Send], select the recipient, and press [Start].
Reference
You can specify the destinations by directly entering them or selecting them from the address book,
Job History, or programs.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-35
5
5.10
Scan Settings
5.10
Scan Settings
Press [Scan Settings] to configure detailed scan settings.
5.10.1
Original Type
Select the original type based on the original contents. The original type you can select are as follows.
Text
Select for the original that consists of only text.
Text/Photo
Select for originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones).
If "Text/Photo" or "Photo" is selected, the photo type can also be selected.
Item
Description
Photo Paper
Select for photos printed on photo paper.
Printed Photo
Select for printed photos such as that in books or magazines.
Photo
Select for originals consisting of only photos (halftones).
Dot Matrix Original
Select for originals consisting of text that generally appears faint.
Copied Paper
Select for originals with an even density produced using a copier or printer.
5-36
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5.10.2
Scan Settings
5
Simplex/Duplex
Select either to scan a single-sided original or to scan a double-sided original.
1-Sided
Select to scan a single-sided original.
2-Sided
Select to scan a double-sided original.
Cover + 2-Sided
Select to scan the first page of the original as a cover in the single sided mode, and the remaining pages in
double-sided mode.
5.10.3
Resolution
Select the resolution for scanning.
Reference
If [300 e 300dpi] or [200 e 100dpi] is selected when sending a G3 fax or Internet fax, the resolution is
automatically changed to 200 e 200dpi.
If destination is selected with IP Address Fax when the compact PDF or compact XPS is selected, or if
destination selected with IP Address Fax is included in broadcast, the scan resolution of 400 e 400dpi
or 600 e 600dpi is changed to 300 e 300dpi.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-37
5
5.10.4
Scan Settings
5.10
File Type
Select the file type for saving the scan data.
File Type
The available file types are as follows.
Item
Description
PDF
Select to save the data in PDF format.
Compact PDF
Select to save compressed data rather than with PDF format.
TIFF
Select to save data in TIFF format.
JPEG
Select to save data in JPEG format.
XPS
Select to save data in XPS format.
Compact XPS
Select to save compressed data rather than with XPS format.
You cannot specify some file formats depending on the "Color" settings. The following shows the
combinations of the "File Type" and "Color" settings.
Auto Color
Full Color
Gray Scale
Black
PDF
o
o
o
o
Compact PDF
o
o
o
-
TIFF
o
o
o
o
JPEG
o
o
o
-
XPS
o
o
o
o
Compact XPS
o
o
o
-
Reference
Specify the file type when downloading data. The file type setting is required even if it is already
selected to save data in a User Box.
When saving a TIFF file in color, the compression format can be specified. For details, refer to
page 9-28.
If you select "JPEG", "By Page" is automatically selected in Page Separation in Scan Setting.
If destination is selected with IP Address Fax when the compact PDF or compact XPS is selected, or if
destination selected with IP Address Fax is included in broadcast, the scan resolution of 400 e 400 dpi
or 600 e 600 dpi is changed to 300 e 300 dpi.
5-38
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
Scan Setting
Data arrangement can be specified when originals containing multiple pages are scanned and sent.
Item
Description
Multi Page
Select to combine all scanned original data and save as a single file. This setting cannot be selected if "JPEG" is selected for the file type.
Page Separation
Select to divide the scanned data at a specified page.
Using the keypad, enter the number of pages to be saved in a file.
Attach to E-mail
Specify the method for attaching a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is
selected.
[All Files to 1 E-Mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail.
• The maximum 300 files can be attached to one E-mail. If the number of
attachment files exceeds 300, files are split and sent as multiple E-mail
messages.
(Example) If the number of split files is 350
1st E-mail: 300 files attached
2nd E-mail: 50 files attached
• If [All Files to 1 E-Mail] is selected, the size of one E-mail is limited to 200
MB or less. If the size of an E-mail exceeds the capacity, files are split and
sent as multiple E-mail messages.
(Example) If the capacity is 200 MB and the size of one E-mail is 250 MB
1st E-mail: 197 MB
2nd E-mail: 53 MB
If [E-mail Transmission (SMTP)] is set to [Binary Division] in Administrator
Settings, the setting for Binary Division is given priority.
• If the server capacity is specified in [E-mail Transmission (SMTP)] in Administrator Settings, files may be split at the specified size and sent as
multiple E-mail messages.
(Example) If the size of one E-mail is 1.5 MB (5 files attached), and the
server capacity is 1 MB
1st E-mail: 0.9 MB (3 files attached)
2nd E-mail: 0.7 MB (2 files attached)
[1 File to 1 E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail.
• If [1 File to 1 E-Mail] is selected, the size of one E-mail is limited to less
than 400 MB. You cannot send E-mail with the size of 400 MB or more.
If [E-mail Transmission (SMTP)] is set to [Binary Division] in Administrator
Settings, the setting for Binary Division is given priority.
Reference
When saving a document in a User Box, it is saved with [Multi Page] while Page Separation is specified.
Page Separation is enabled when sending by E-mail, SMB, or FTP.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-39
5
Scan Settings
5.10
Encryption
If the "PDF" or "Compact PDF" is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified.
Item
Description
Password
Enter the password necessary to open encrypted
data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter
the password twice.
Document Permissions
Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice.
Detail Settings
Allows you to configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in "Encryption".
Printing Allowed
Select whether to allow or restrict printing data.
[Low Resolution] appears when Encryption Level
is set to "High Level".
• If "Low Level" is selected
•
5-40
If "High Level" is selected
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
Item
Detail Settings
Description
Changes Allowed
Press [Forward
] in the Detail Settings screen
to select the change allowable level in detail. In
[Changes Allowed], select the permission level for
making changes to the document such as digital
signature, inputs and annotations.
• If "Low Level" is selected
•
If "High Level" is selected
Stamp Composition
Press to select the composition method for contents added in the Stamp/Composition setting.
What can be combined as text are date/time, page number and header/footer.
Stamps are combined as images.
Item
Description
Image
Select to insert character strings as image.
Text
Select to insert character strings as text.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-41
5
Scan Settings
5.10
Outline PDF
Configure this item when you select [Compact PDF] for the file type. This function performs outline
processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an
application such as Adobe Illustrator.
d Reference
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating an outline PDF. For
details, refer to page 9-28.
5.10.5
Density
Adjust the density for the scanned document.
To adjust the density, press [Light] or [Dark].
Press [Standard] to return to default value.
5-42
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5.10.6
5
Scan Settings
Color (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/IP/I-FAX)
Specify whether to scan originals in color or black-and-white.
Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected "File Type" setting. The following shows
the combinations of the "File Type" and "Color" settings.
Auto Color
Full Color
Gray Scale
Black
PDF
o
o
o
o
Compact PDF
o
o
o
-
TIFF
o
o
o
o
JPEG
o
o
o
-
XPS
o
o
o
o
Compact XPS
o
o
o
-
Reference
When saving a TIFF file in color, the compression format can be specified. For details, refer to
page 9-28.
If you select "JPEG", "By Page" is automatically selected in Page Separation in Scan Setting.
Auto Color
Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting.
Full Color
Scans originals in full color.
Gray Scale
Select for originals with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos.
Black
Select for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-43
5
5.10.7
Scan Settings
5.10
Scan Size
Select to determine the size of paper to be scanned.
Standard
Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. Select the size to
scan the original with predetermined paper size such as 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) or 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 (B5).
Custom Size
Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes.
X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 17 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm).
Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11 - 11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm).
5-44
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
Photo Size
Select the "3 x 5" or "2-1/4 x 3-1/4" photo size.
5.10.8
Image Adjustment - Background Removal
This function removes background or adjusts background density of originals to be scanned.
Select either [Bleed Removal] or [Paper Discoloration Adj], and adjust the density with "Background
Removal Level".
To adjust the density automatically, press [Auto].
Item
Description
Bleed Removal
When scanning a double-sided original, the print on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Such background prints can be adjusted.
Paper Discoloration Adj
When scanning originals printed on colored paper, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-45
5
5.10.9
Scan Settings
5.10
Image Adjustment - Sharpness
When scanning, contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized.
5.10.10 Application - Frame Erase
Select to erase frames of the original.
To erase all frames with the same width, press [Frame] and specify a numeric value between 1/16 and
2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).
To specify widths for the top, left, right and bottom respectively, press the button for the desired side,
and specify a numeric value.
To not to erase frames, press [None].
Reference
If the width to be erased around the original is specified with "Frame Erase" of the Book Copy function,
the same settings also applies to "Frame Erase".
5-46
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
Scan Settings
5
5.10.11 Application - Book Copy
Select to scan two-page spreads. In addition, the binding position and erase settings can be specified.
Reference
Specify the size of the two-page spread as the scan size.
This function cannot be set with Quick Memory TX.
Book Spread
Select to scan a page spread as a single page.
Separation
Select to scan a page spread as two separate pages (left and right).
Front Cover
Select to scan the first page as the front cover.
Front + Back Covers
Select to scan the first page as the front cover, the second page as the back cover, and the remaining pages
as the body.
Book Erase - Frame Erase
Select to erase a frame in scanning spread pages.
To erase all frames with the same width, press [Frame] and specify a numeric value between 1/16 and
2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm).
To specify widths for the top, left, right and bottom respectively, press the button for the desired side,
and specify a numeric value.
To not to erase frames, press [None].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-47
5
Scan Settings
5.10
Reference
If the width to be erased around the original is specified with "Frame Erase" of the Book Copy function,
the same settings also applies to "Frame Erase".
Book Erase - Center Erase
Select to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original.
Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and
30.0 mm).
Binding Position
If Separation, Front Cover or Front and Back Cover was selected, press [Binding Position] to select the
binding position.
5-48
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
5.10.12 Application - Annotation
Scanned and saved document data can be printed or transmitted with an image of the date/time or an
annotation number.
Selecting the Annotation User Box
To use the Annotation User Box function, scanned data must be saved in the Annotation User Box in
advance. Annotation numbers are specified for each User Box. Select the User Box to save the data.
Reference
To use the Annotation User Box, it must be registered in advance. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Box Operations]".
5.10.13 Application - Stamp/Composition
Date/Time
Prints the date and time data that has been printed on a page.
Item
Description
Date Format
Select the format to display the date.
Time Format
Specify whether to add the time, and select the
format to display the time.
Pages
Select whether to print on All Pages or 1st Page
Only.
Print Position
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Print Position
Select the print position.
Fine-Tune
To fine-tune the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)
5-49
5
Scan Settings
Item
Text Details
5.10
Description
Text Color
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.
Text Size
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which
text is printed.
Text Type
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
Page Number
Add page numbers to all pages of the document.
Item
Description
Starting Page Number
Specify the starting page number.
Starting Chapter Number
Specify the starting chapter number.
Page Number Type
Select the format to display a page number.
Print Position
Text Details
5-50
Print Position
Select the print position.
Fine-Tune
To fine-tune the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)
Text Color
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.
Text Size
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which
text is printed.
Text Type
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
Stamp
Prints a predetermined character string such as "URGENT" on a page.
Item
Description
Stamp Type/Preset Stamp
Select the stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE
REPLY or DO NOT COPY.
Pages
Select whether to print the date and time on all
pages or the first page only.
Text Color
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.
Text Size
Select the printing text size from Minimal or Std.
(Standard).
Print Position
Print Position
Select the print position.
Fine-Tune
To fine-tune the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position
to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm)
Header/Footer
This function inserts headers or footers on all pages. Before you insert the header or footer, you must register
their contents in Administrator Settings. Press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered settings
for printing.
d Reference
For details on registering a header/footer, refer to page 10-5.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-51
5
Scan Settings
5.10
Item
Description
Recall Header/Footer
Select the target header or footer in the registered
contents.
Check/Change Temporarily
Select to display the contents that you can
Check/Change Temporarily.
Header Settings, Footer Settings
Text
Specify a header or footer string via the control
panel.
Date/Time
Specify the date/time for the header/footer.
Other
Specify the distribution control number, job
number, or serial number of the header or footer.
• The serial number is that attached to the machine. For details on settings, contact your
service representative.
Pages
Text Details
Specify whether to print the header and footer.
Pressing [Print] allows you to specify whether to
print text, the date/time or other information (distribution control number, job number or serial
number).
Select whether to print the date and time on all
pages or the first page only.
Text Color
Select the printing color from black, red, blue,
green, yellow, cyan, or magenta.
Text Size
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which
text is printed.
Text Type
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
5.10.14 Application - Send & Print
Specify whether to print documents while they are being sent. Also, configure the print settings.
Reference
To use the staple function, the optional finisher is required.
Copies
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable number is 1 to 9999.
Simplex/Duplex
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
5-52
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.10
5
Scan Settings
Staple
Select whether to staple the printed sheets.
Item
Description
Position Setting
If you select the type of stapling, you can specify the position.
5.10.15 Application - TX Stamp (G3/IP/I-FAX)
TX Stamp
When sending a fax using the ADF, apply this function to stamp the TX Stamp on the scanned originals to
make sure that each page of the original has been scanned. TX Stamp is stamped only on the front-sided
page for double-sided originals.
Original face
Original feeding
direction
Stamp Position
-
When it is stamped, a 3/16 inches (4 mm) diameter pink stamp appears in the location as shown in the
diagram.
To use TX Stamp, the optional Stamp unit is required.
The ink used for stamping is consumables. If the ink becomes faint, contact your service representative.
If mixed originals are loaded, the stamp may not be stamped on the location as shown in the diagram.
To check that the original has been successfully transmitted, refer to the transmission report or the
transmission result that appears on the setting confirmation screen.
If the quick memory transmission has been selected, selecting TX Stamp cancels the quick memory
transmission.
Stamping TX Stamp
Select [TX Stamp] in the Application screen.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-53
5
Scan Settings
5.10
5.10.16 Document Name (E-mail/BOX/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/I-FAX)
Enter the document name in the control panel.
5.10.17 Separate Scan
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of
originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when placing the originals on the original glass, or when single-sided
originals and double-sided originals are mixed. To select this setting, press [Separate Scan] to highlight it.
5-54
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.11
5.11
Original Settings
5
Original Settings
Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals.
Reference
The original setting and orientation functions can be used together.
5.11.1
Special Original - Mixed Original
Select when originals of different sizes are loaded together into the ADF. The scanning speed will be lowered
because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned.
5.11.2
Special Original - Z-Folded Original
Select this setting to detect the size of a z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF.
5.11.3
Special Original - Long Original
Available when loading an original of which the Duplex Paper Passage size is longer than the standard size
(11 e 17 or A3).
5.11.4
Direction Settings - Original Direction
Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is
correctly oriented.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-55
5
5.11.5
Original Settings
5.11
Direction Settings - Binding Position
Select to specify the binding position, such as when holes are punched in the original or the original is
stapled. This adjusts the scan of double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed.
5.11.6
Item
Description
Auto
When you select this setting, the binding position is set to the long side if the
size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise.
Top
Original with the page margin at the top
Left
Original with the page margin at the left
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) (G3)
If the quick memory transmission is performed, the total number of pages are automatically printed in "Page
number" of the transmission source information in the format of "P. Page Number/Total pages". Select Quick
Memory TX, and then press [Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)], and enter the number of original pages
using the keypad.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Memory TX
Cover + 2-Sided (Scan Settings - Simplex/Duplex)
Frame Erase
Book Copy
Scan Size
Mixed Original
Polling TX
Polling RX
Bulletin
Timer TX
5-56
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.11
5
Original Settings
Reference
If the specified number of pages does not match to that actually scanned, the specified number of
pages is printed.
This function is not available for memory transmission, since the total number of pages are
automatically added.
5.11.7
Despeckle
Select to reduce the effect that dust on the slit glass has on images when the original is loaded into the ADF.
Reference
Specifying Despeckle will lower the scanning speed.
If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-57
5
Communication Settings
5.12
Communication Settings
5.12.1
Line Settings (G3)
5.12
With this function, configure line settings for Fax TX.
Overseas TX
The transmission rate is set to a lower level when having a poor communication.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Polling TX
Polling RX
Bulletin
ECM OFF
The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data.
This is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate
with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from
disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a
communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns
to ECM ON.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Polling RX
Polling TX
V34 OFF
Bulletin registration
Bulletin Polling RX
Reference
This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified.
5-58
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.12
5
Communication Settings
V34 OFF
V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. There are cases when the
communication is not possible in super G3 mode depending on the telephone line conditions when the
recipient's machine or this machine is connected to the line via a private branch exchange.
In such cases, we recommend that you transmit a fax by selecting V34 OFF to disable the super G3 mode.
The V34 mode is resumed automatically on completion of transmission.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Polling RX
Polling TX
Bulletin registration
Bulletin Polling RX
ECM OFF
Check Dest. & Send
When sending a fax job, a specified fax number is compared with receiver's fax number information (CSI)
and, if they match, a fax is sent. A mismatch results in a transmission error occurs. This prevents misdirected
transmissions.
Reference
To check the destination and send, the fax number of this machine must be registered with the
recipient's fax machine.
Select Line
If two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed, you can select [Line 1] or [Line 2] to send a fax. Specify the line
used for sending faxes. Selecting "Not Set" uses an idle one of lines 1 and 2 to send data. If both lines are
idle, Line 1 is used first.
Reference
You cannot specify a line when "Line 2 Setting" is set to "RX Only" in "Multi Line Usage Setting".
To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select
"Not Set", a sending failure may occur.
5.12.2
E-Mail Settings (E-mail/I-FAX)
E-Mail Settings
Specify the Document Name, Subject, From and Body for sending E-mail messages.
Document Name
The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in [Document Name]
of [Scan Settings]. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can
enter up to 30 characters.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-59
5
Communication Settings
5.12
Subject
The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input].
You can enter up to 64 characters.
From
The E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu is displayed.
Reference
The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing.
You cannot directly enter the address when "Change the From Address" is set to Restrict in
Administrator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings].
Body
The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You
can enter up to 256 characters.
5-60
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.12
5.12.3
Communication Settings
5
URL Notification Setting (FTP/SMB/WebDAV)
URL Notification
Specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job.
Reference
A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified
for the destination in URL Notification Setting.
URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails, Internet faxes or G3 faxes.
Detail Search
You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of
the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index.
Direct Input
Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-61
5
5.12.4
Communication Settings
5.12
Communication Method Settings (G3)
You can specify how to send or receive data.
Quick Memory TX
A method used to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the original. This method allows
even originals with many pages to be sent without overflowing memory.
Reference
If the optional security kit SC-507 is installed, and [Security Details] - [Copy guard] or [Password copy]
is set to [Yes] in Administrator Settings, [Quick Memory TX] is not displayed.
5-62
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.12
5
Communication Settings
Polling RX - Normal
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send set documents or documents to be
transmitted through polling reservation in the sender's machine. This is convenient when communication
costs are to be borne by the receiver.
Select [Normal] and select the recipient.
Polling RX - Bulletin
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send documents set in the sender's bulletin
board.
To receive documents stored in the bulletin board, select [Bulletin], enter the bulletin board number using
keypad, and select the recipient.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Quick Memory TX
Memory TX
Frame Erase
Scan Size
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)
Mixed Original
Z folded Original
Long Original
Binding position
Polling TX
Overseas TX
ECM OFF
Password TX
F-Code TX
V34 OFF
Separate Scan
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-63
5
Communication Settings
5.12
Reference
You can enter up to 9-digit number for the bulletin board number.
Timer TX
Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in
the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time.
Reference
Set the time in hours or minutes.
You cannot specify the date.
Password TX
This function sends documents with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network
reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network
reception.
You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network
reception (with password) function.
Use the keypad to enter the password.
5-64
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.12
5
Communication Settings
Polling TX - Normal
Used to save documents to be transmitted through reserved polling transmission based on a receiver's
instruction.
Select [Normal] when scanning originals to save data in the Polling TX User Box.
d Reference
For details on deleting or checking documents in the Polling TX User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
Reference
When user authentication is enabled, the user cannot perform polling transmission if the user is not
permitted to access to the saved documents.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-65
5
Communication Settings
5.12
Polling TX - Bulletin
Used to save documents in the bulletin board to be transmitted based on a receiver's instruction.
Select [Bulletin], enter the bulletin board number using the keypad, and scan the original. Documents are
saved automatically in the Bulletin Board User Box that has been registered in advance.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Quick Memory TX
Memory TX
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)
Polling TX
Timer TX
Overseas TX
ECM OFF
Password TX
F-Code TX
V34 OFF
Reference
For the bulletin board number, enter the box number between 1 to 999999999 of the Bulletin Board
User Box that has been registered in advance.
Only one document can be saved in a single bulletin board.
You can create up to 10 bulletin boards for this machine.
d Reference
For details on deleting or checking documents in the Bulletin Board User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
5-66
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.12
5
Communication Settings
F-Code TX
This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB
address and the password. Specific User Boxes include the followings.
Confidential transmission
–
Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User
Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box.
Relay transmission
–
Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote
machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the
SUB Address box and the password in the Password box.
Reference
To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function.
5.12.5
E-Mail Encryption (E-mail)
This item is displayed when "ON" is selected in "S/MIME Communication Settings" of Administrator Settings
- "Network Settings" - [E-mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine.
d Reference
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
5.12.6
Digital Signature (E-mail)
This item is displayed when "ON" is selected in "S/MIME Communication Settings" of Administrator Settings
- "Network Settings" - [E-mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from
this machine.
Reference
You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature
depending on the S/MIME communication settings.
d Reference
For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-67
5
5.12.7
Communication Settings
5.12
Fax Header Settings (G3/IP/I-FAX)
Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from
the sender name list.
Reference
To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use "Header Information"
in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 10-16.
To register how the header information will be added, use "Header/Footer Position" in Administrator
Settings. For details, refer to page 10-17.
If two units of fax kit FK-502 have been installed, you can configure Fax Header Settings for each line.
For details, refer to page 10-20.
5-68
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5.13
5.13
5
Redialing (G3/IP)
Redialing (G3/IP)
Redialing refers to the operation to dial to the same destination again.
If a fax cannot be sent for example because the recipient's line is busy, the machine redials after a specified
period has elapsed.
5.13.1
Auto redialing
If a fax cannot be sent, for example because the recipient's line is busy, the machine automatically redials
the same destination for the number of redials specified in Line Parameter Setting.
The transmission job is handled as reserved job for redialing before the job is redialed.
Reference
The auto redial count and interval are specified as shown below by factory default. For details on
specifying the number of auto redials, refer to page 10-18.
3 times at 3-minute intervals
5.13.2
Manual redialing
Redialing of a job for which the status is set to pending for redial, can be performed from the Job Details
screen.
Press the [Send] tab in [Job List] - [Job Details], select a job which status is "Waiting To Redial", and press
[Redial].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
5-69
5
5.13.3
Redialing (G3/IP)
5.13
Fax Retransmit (G3)
The job, which could not be sent although the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter
Setting, is saved in Fax Retransmit User Box. Such jobs can be redialed manually by opening Fax Retransmit
User Box.
Press [Send], select the job that you want to send it again, and press [Fax].
Reference
To save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must configure the Incomplete TX Hold
settings in Administrator Settings in advance. For details on the Incomplete TX Hold settings, refer to
page 10-27.
For details on the Fax Retransmit User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
5-70
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6
Receiving (G3/IP/I-FAX)
6.1
6
6
Receiving (G3: Without external telephone connected)
Receiving (G3/IP/I-FAX)
This section explains the types of fax reception and respective operations.
6.1
Receiving (G3: Without external telephone connected)
6.1.1
Auto RX (Dedicated for fax line)
Specify this mode to use the telephone line dedicated for fax transmission. The machine automatically starts
receiving fax data when it detects the ring signal for the specified times.
Incoming call
Received
document
Start receiving automatically
Reference
To receive fax data in auto mode, Receive Mode must be set to "Auto RX" in "Line Parameter Setting"
of the Utility menu.
To use the telephone line dedicated for fax transmission, the following settings are required.
External telephone: Not connected
Line Parameter Setting - Receive Mode: Set to [Auto RX]
d Reference
For details on Line Parameter Setting, refer to page 10-18.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-3
6
Receiving (G3: With external telephone connected)
6.2
Receiving (G3: With external telephone connected)
6.2.1
Manual RX (Dedicated telephone line)
6.2
It is convenient to set the machine to manual mode if an external telephone is connected to this machine and
the line is primarily used for telephone communication.
Incoming call
The external telephone rings continuously.
- Pick up the receiver and talk
Reference
To use the line dedicated for telephone communication, Receive Mode must be set to "Manual RX" in
"Line Parameter Setting" of the Utility menu.
To receive fax data manually by operating the control panel of this machine, when the external telephone
rings, press [Off-Hook] in the Fax/Scan Mode screen, and make sure [RX] is selected. Press [Start] in the OffHook screen.
To receive fax data manually, the following settings are required.
External telephone: Connected (Answering machine OFF)
Line Parameter Setting - Receive Mode: Set to [Manual RX]
6-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6.3
6.3
Receiving (I-FAX)
6
Receiving (I-FAX)
E-mail messages can be received either automatically or manually. When this machine receives an E-mail
message, the E-mail text and attachment file are printed automatically.
Data is saved in the Memory RX User Box if "Memory RX Setting" is enabled in the Utility menu. The saved
documents can be printed as needed.
d Reference
For details on printing documents saved in the Memory RX User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
Reference
This machine is capable of receiving E-mail data of maximum 3000 pages for attachment file and
maximum 20K byte for text.
Receiving E-mails automatically
The machine automatically checks the POP server for new E-mail messages at a predetermined time interval.
Reference
The interval for checking E-mail can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. For details on setting this function,
refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
It is set at 15 minutes by factory default.
Receiving E-mails manually
Press a button of this machine to check for E-mail messages to the POP server.
Press [Receive I-Fax] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-5
6
6.4
Receiving (IP)
6.4
Receiving (IP)
This machine prints data automatically upon reception of IP Address Fax.
Data is saved in the Memory RX User Box if "Memory RX Setting" is enabled in the Utility menu. The saved
documents can be printed as needed.
d Reference
For details on printing documents saved in the Memory RX User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
6-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6.5
In-memory proxy reception
6.5
In-memory proxy reception
6.5.1
In-memory proxy reception
6
When it is unable to print a received document due to paper jamming, running short of consumables or other
reasons, data is saved in the memory until the machine is ready to print it again. This function is referred to
as In-memory proxy reception.
After recovering from trouble such as paper jamming, the saved reception document is printed
automatically.
This function may not be available if the memory is full.
6.5.2
Forwarding of job after in-memory proxy reception (G3)
If the machine is unable to recover from trouble, the job stored in the memory can be forwarded to another
destination. In the [Job List] - [Job Details] screen, press the [Receive] tab. Select the job that you want to
forward, and press [Forward]. Specify the destination and press [Start] to complete the job.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-7
6
6.6
Printing upon data reception
6.6
Printing upon data reception
When a document is received, the paper size of the received document is compared with the paper size in
the paper tray, and the document is printed either by being reduced to the specified zoom ratio, or to the size
that the document fits the paper size to be printed. If the machine is configured to print received documents
in the same magnification, received documents are printed in full size regardless the paper size setting of the
received documents.
6.6.1
Printing at reduced size
When a standard-size document is received, it is printed according to the zoom ratio specified for the paper
size. (Default: 96%)
Original
Received document
Reduced
according
to the [Min.
Reduction
for RX Print]
setting
d Reference
For details on the zoom ratio setting, refer to page 10-20.
6.6.2
Printing at reduced size to fit the paper size to be printed
If a document size longer than the standard size is received, the optimal paper size is determined based on
the width and length of the received document and printed accordingly. If the optimal-size paper is not
loaded in the paper tray, the document size is reduced to the near-size paper.
Original
Received document
Reduced to
fit onto
paper
The following describes the procedure to determine the optimal paper size and criteria for selecting the paper
size.
6-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6.6
6
Printing upon data reception
Step 1: Select optimal paper size
Determines the optimal paper size based on the width and length of the received document according to the
following rule.
Width of received document
Print position of
reception information
Length of received document
A4-width
[OFF] or [Inside
Body Text]
0 to 150
151 to 305
306 to 390
391 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 141
142 to 296
297 to 381
382 or more
Paper size to be selected
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
B4-width
[OFF] or [Inside
Body Text]
0 to 232
233 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 223
224 or more
Paper size to be selected
8-1/2 e 11 v
11 e 17 w
A3-width
[OFF] or [Inside
Body Text]
0 to 232
233 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 223
224 or more
8-1/2 e 11 v
11 e 17 w
Paper size to be selected
Width of received document
Print position of reception
information
Length of received document
A4-width
[OFF] or [Inside Body
Text]
0 to 154
155 to 314
315 to 386
387 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 146
147 to 306
307 to 378
379 or more
Paper size to be selected
A5 v
A4 w
B4 w
A3 w
B4-width
[OFF] or [Inside Body
Text]
0 to 195
196 to 395
396 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 186
187 to 386
387 or more
Paper size to be selected
B5 v
B4 w
A3 w
A3-width
[OFF] or [Inside Body
Text]
0 to 226
227 or more
[Outside Body
Text]
0 to 217
218 or more
A4 v
A3 w
Paper size to be selected
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-9
6
Printing upon data reception
6.6
Step 2: Select actual print paper size
Checks whether the paper size determined in Step 1 is loaded in the machine or not.
Optimal paper size loaded:
Printing starts.
Optimal paper size unavailable, or [Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF] (automatic paper tray switching function)
of the paper tray is set to [OFF]:
The alternative paper size is searched for in the descending order as shown in the table. At this time, if
[Print Separate Fax Pages] in the Utility mode is set to [ON], the paper size is searched for based on the
precondition that the document is divided and printed on multiple pages.
–
For details on [Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF], refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
[Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]:
The print paper is searched for in the descending order.
Even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF], when a long original is received or a document is
received in high resolution, the document may be divided and printed on multiple pages.
Optimal paper
size
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
Paper selection
order
(From top to bottom)
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
11 e 17 w
A3 w
A5 v
A4 w
A4 v
B4 w
B4 w
A5 w
A4 v
A4 w
A3 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
11 e 17 w
11 e 17 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
A4 w
A4 w
B4 w
B4 w
A4 w
A4 v
A3 w
A3 w
A4 v
B5 v
B5 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
Optimal paper size
A5 v
A4 w
B5 v
B4 w
A4 v
A3 w
Paper selection order
(From top to bottom)
A5 v
A4 w
B5 v
B4 w
A4 v
A3 w
A5 w
A4 v
B5 w
A3 w
A4 w
B4 w
A4 w
B4 w
B4 w
A4 w
B4 w
A4 w
A4 v
A3 w
A4 w
A4 v
A3 w
B5 v
A4 v
B5 w
A3 w
B4 w
A3 w
6-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6.6
6
Printing upon data reception
[Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]:
The print paper is searched for in the descending order.
Even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], when the width of the selected print paper is smaller
than that of the image in the received document, the document size is reduced according to the paper
width.
Optimal paper
size
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
Paper selection
order
(From top to bottom)
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w
A4 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
11 e 17 w
A3 w
A5 v
8-1/2 e 14 w
A4 v
B4 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
A5 w
11 e 17 w
A4 w
A3 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
B4 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
8-1/2 e 11 v
A4 v
8-1/2 e 11 v
A3 w
11 e 17 w
8-1/2 e 11 w
A4 w
A4 w
B4 w
A4 v
A4 v
A3 w
A4 w
B5 v
B5 w
8-1/2 e 14 w
11 e 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
Optimal paper size
A5 v
A4 w
B5 v
B4 w
A4 v
A3 w
Paper selection order
(From top to bottom)
A5 v
A4 w
B5 v
B4 w
A4 v
A3 w
A5 w
B4 w
B5 w
B5 v
A4 w
A4 v
A4 w
A3 w
B4 w
B5 w
B4 w
A4 w
A4 v
A4 w
A3 w
A3 w
B5 w
A4 v
A4 v
B5 v
A3 w
A4 w
B4 w
A3 w
For the paper sizes of B5 w, B5 v, A4 w and A4 v, the document is divided and printed on multiple pages.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-11
6
Printing upon data reception
6.6
Restrictions for printing
The following lists the restrictions on printing documents.
Documents are printed in reduced size if the print paper size is smaller than that determined in Step 1.
If [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF], documents are automatically rotated by 90 degrees if the
orientation of the print paper does not match with that determined in Step 1.
To print multiple-page documents of mixed size, the functions and settings described in this section
are determined for each page.
If the paper size determined in Step 1 and 2 is loaded in multiple paper trays, the paper tray is selected
according to the setting specified in [Auto Tray Selection Settings].
If only the bypass tray is assigned for the thus determined paper size, feed paper from the bypass tray
for printing. However, if the bypass tray is not included in the options of "Auto Tray Select" in [Auto Tray
Selection Settings], the bypass tray cannot be used for feeding paper.
If [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], and [TX/RX Settings] in the Utility menu configured as
follows, documents are not divided.
–
A specific tray is assigned in [Tray Selection for RX Print].
–
[Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [Full Size].
–
[Print Paper Selection] is set to [Fixed Size] or [Priority Size].
–
[Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON].
If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the paper tray, a message appears prompting you to load the
paper of the size.
–
If [Print Paper Selection] is set to [Priority Size], any one of the paper sizes 8-1/2 e 11, 8-1/2 e 14, and
11 e 17 (A4, B4, or A3) is selected as optimal paper size. If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the
paper tray, the paper size is selected according to the normal procedure.
–
If [Print Paper Selection] is set to [Fixed Size], any one of the paper sizes 8-1/2 e 11, 8-1/2 e 14, and
11 e 17 (A4, B4, or A3) is selected as optimal paper size. If the selected-size paper is not loaded in the
paper tray, a message appears prompting you to supply the paper of the size. The message remains
displayed until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.
–
If [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to other than [Auto], documents are printed on the paper loaded in
the paper tray (except the bypass tray) specified in [Tray Selection for RX Print ]. If the specified paper
size is smaller than that of the received document, the document is printed in reduced size. If the paper
tray runs out of paper, a message appears prompting you to supply the paper of the size. The message
remains displayed until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.
–
If [Print Paper Selection] is set to other than [Auto Select] and [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to other
than [Auto], higher priority is given to the setting in [Tray Selection for RX Print].
d Reference
For details on [Print Separate Fax Pages], refer to page 10-20.
For details on [Auto Tray Selection Settings], refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
For details on [Tray Selection for RX Print], [Min. Reduction for RX Print], [Print Paper Selection] and [Duplex
Print (RX)], refer to page 10-20.
6.6.3
Printing at full size
If [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to "Full Size" in the Utility menu, documents are printed on the paper of
the same size at the same magnification. If the same-size paper is not available, it is printed on the paper
larger than the original size.
Original
Received document
Printed at
full size
6-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6.6
6
Printing upon data reception
Reference
A document cannot be divided to print on multiple pages.
The image size larger than 11 e 17 (A3) cannot be printed.
If the paper tray of the optimal paper size runs out of paper, a message appears prompting you to
supply the paper of the size. The message remains displayed until the paper is loaded in the paper tray.
6.6.4
Printing method upon data reception
The following describes the relationship between the paper size of the received document and the paper size
to be printed.
Paper size of received document
[Min. Reduction for RX Print] setting
Full Size
96 to 87%
Printed on the same
paper size at the
same scale
Printed on the same
paper size at reduced
scale
Printed on the same
or larger paper at the
same scale
Printed on the optimal paper size at reduced scale
If a specific tray is
assigned in [Tray
Selection for RX
Print]
Print Separate Fax Pages ON
Printed on long paper
(longer than standard
size)
Print Separate Fax Pages OFF
Standard size (11 e 17 to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A3 to A5))
Printed on the same
or larger paper at the
same scale
Printed on divided
pages depending on
the paper size
Printed on the paper
of specified paper
tray at reduced scale
Printed on the paper
of specified paper
tray at reduced scale
Printed on the paper
of specified paper
tray at reduced scale
Reference
If [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON], double-sided printing is possible. For details, refer to page 10-20.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
6-13
6
6.7
Footer Position
6.7
Footer Position
Reception date, time, reception number and page number are automatically added to the received document
for printing. The received information is printed on the following location of the document according to the
"Header/Footer Position" setting.
Reference
To send a document in color using the IP Address Fax function, the information is printed only within
the original image area.
d Reference
For details on the setting of reception information, refer to page 10-17.
Inside Body Text
The reception information is printed so that it is overlaid on part of the original image.
2005/01/20 13:43
R001 P.001/003
Outside Body Text
The reception information is printed on the outside of the original image area.
2005/01/20 13:43
R001 P.001/003
Not Printed
If [OFF] is selected, the reception information is not printed.
6-14
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7
Convenient functions
(G3/IP/I-FAX)
7.1
7
7
Memory RX (G3/IP/I-FAX)
Convenient functions (G3/IP/I-FAX)
This section explains the convenient functions for fax transmission.
7.1
Memory RX (G3/IP/I-FAX)
Received documents can be saved and printed as required. This function is referred to as memory reception.
Received documents are saved in the Memory RX User Box. Access the User Box and print the document.
Unnecessary documents can be deleted as well.
d Reference
For details on printing or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
7.2
PC-Fax RX (G3)
A function to save document data, when received by fax, to User Boxes in the machine's internal hard disk.
The saved data can be printed or sent. Memory RX User Box or any User Boxes specified are used as saving
destination User Boxes.
Hard disk
1000
Original
2000
Hard
disk
Sender
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Memory RX
Fax Forwarding
TSI Distribution
d Reference
For details on printing, sending, or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
For details on PC-Fax RX Setting, refer to page 10-27.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7-3
7
7.3
TSI Distribution (G3)
7.3
TSI Distribution (G3)
Documents received with the fax ID of the sender (TSI) can be automatically distributed to the forwarding
destinations prepared for each sender. The following destinations can be specified for forwarding.
User Box
E-Mail Address
FTP
SMB
WebDAV
Hard disk
1000
Original
2000
Hard
disk
Sender
FTP server
E-mail
Mail server
FTP
SMB server
Shared folder
WebDAV server
WebDAV
Reference
The received document is printed if it could not be distributed successfully.
Up to 128 locations can be registered for forwarding destination TSI.
d Reference
For details on TSI User Box Settings, refer to page 10-28.
7-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7.4
7.4
7
Confidential RX (G3)
Confidential RX (G3)
A function to transmit an original between you and specific persons using the Confidential User Box. Sending
an original to a Confidential User Box of the recipient machine is referred to as confidential transmission, and
receiving an original in a Confidential User Box of your machine is referred to as confidential reception. This
function is available only if the recipient's machine is capable of handling F code.
Send
Receive
Confidential
User Box
Settings required for confidential reception
To receive data by confidential reception, create a User Box to be used for confidential reception in this
machine. The setting for confidential reception can be specified when creating a Public, Personal, or Group
User Box in the hard disk of this machine.
d Reference
For details on the Confidential RX setting when creating a User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
Receiving by confidential reception
When a document is received by confidential reception, it is saved in a Confidential User Box. Access the
User Box and print the document. Unnecessary documents can be deleted as well.
d Reference
For details on printing or deleting documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
Sending by confidential transmission
To send a fax by confidential transmission, enter the box number of the destination Confidential User Box
and password.
d Reference
For information on the confidential transmission, refer to page 5-67.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7-5
7
Relay distribution (G3)
7.5
Relay distribution (G3)
7.5.1
Description of relay distribution
7.5
A function to send fax via a relay distribution station. When a document is sent by fax, it is saved in a relay
distribution station and forwarded to the destination afterwards. When there are multiple broadcast
destinations at distant places, by grouping the broadcast destinations to the relay station for each region, the
entire amount of the communication charges can be reduced by doing the relay transmission from the
relaying station.
Relay instruction
station
Relay distribution station
Relay distribution
destination
Local call
Long distance
call
-
Relay distribution
destination
The fax machine that requests a relay transmission and sends a document is referred to as "relay
instruction station".
The fax machine that receives fax data from the relay instruction station and relays it to the destination
is referred to as "relay distribution station".
This function is available only if the relay distribution station's machine is capable of handling F code.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Polling TX
Polling RX
Bulletin registration
Bulletin Polling RX
Password TX
7.5.2
To perform relay distribution
This machine can serve as a relay instruction station and relay distribution station.
To use this machine as a relay instruction station for sending fax data, refer to page 7-7.
To use this machine as a relay distribution station, the Relay User Box for saving documents for relay
distribution and the destinations must be registered to this machine.
To specify a group of destinations, the group must first be registered.
d Reference
For details on registering the Relay User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
7-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7.5
7.5.3
Relay distribution (G3)
7
Sending fax to the relay distribution station
Select [F-Code TX] in [Communication Settings] - [Communication Method Settings], and configure the
following settings.
SUB Address: Enter the Relay User Box number of the relay distribution station using the keypad.
Password: Enter the relay password.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7-7
7
Polling TX/RX (G3)
7.6
Polling TX/RX (G3)
7.6.1
Polling TX
7.6
A function to save documents in the internal hard disk to send it based on a receiver's polling instruction. For
details on saving documents in the Polling Transmission User Box, refer to page 5-65.
When a document is specified for polling transmission, it is saved in the Polling Transmission User Box
in the System User Box.
Only one document can be saved in the Polling Transmission User Box.
The saved document is specified for memory transmission automatically.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Quick Memory TX
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)
Polling RX
Timer TX
Overseas TX
ECM OFF
F-Code TX
Password TX
V34 OFF
Bulletin registration
Bulletin Polling RX
7.6.2
Polling RX
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send saved documents or documents to be
transmitted through polling reservation in the sender's machine. This is convenient when communication
costs are to be borne by the receiver. For details on Polling RX, refer to page 5-65.
This function cannot be used together with the following functions.
Quick Memory TX
Frame Erase
Scan Size
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX)
Mixed Original
Z-folded Original
Long Original
Binding Position
Confidential transmission
Relay request
Polling TX
Overseas TX
ECM OFF
Password TX
V34 OFF
Bulletin registration
Bulletin Polling RX
7-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7.7
7.7
7
Bulletin (G3)
Bulletin (G3)
A function to register a bulletin board, and to register a posting documents to be viewed. To register a bulletin
board, first register the Bulletin Board User Box, and then save the document using the User Box mode.
Documents posted on the bulletin board can be taken out, deleted or printed by accessing through the
Bulletin Board User Box.
Bulletin board
Browse
Polling
Register
d Reference
For details on registering and operating the Bulletin Board User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]".
7.8
Fax transmission using extension lines (G3)
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, different functionality can be specified to the second line by
configuring separately. The following shows the available functions.
Line Parameter Setting: The dialing scheme, number of incoming rings, and line monitoring sound can
be specified.
Function Settings: Configures PC-FAX transmission settings.
Multi Line Settings: Role of the line such as TX Only and RX Only can be assigned.
Sender Fax No.: Sender fax ID can be assigned to the extension line individually.
Reference
These functions can be specified in [Fax Settings] - [Multi Line Settings] in Administrator Settings. For
details, refer to page 10-32.
7.9
Fax forwarding (G3)
Received documents can be forwarded to the pre-set destination. The following shows the available
functions.
This machine can be configured so that it forwards the document and prints the same document.
If two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed, this setting can be specified for each line.
Reference
These functions can be specified in [Fax Settings] - [Function Settings] - [Fax Forwarding Settings] in
Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 10-26.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
7-9
7
7-10
Fax forwarding (G3)
7.9
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8
Description of reports and
lists
8.1
8
8
Types of reports and lists
Description of reports and lists
This section explains how to print various reports and lists and provides descriptions.
8.1
Types of reports and lists
Reports and lists printed with this machine are as follows.
8.1.1
Reports
There are reports that are printed automatically, reports for which printing method can be specified, and
reports that are printed upon requests.
Report name
Description
Activity Report
[G3][I-FAX][IP]
This report contains the transmission and reception log. The report can contain up to 700 records in total, and in separate pages for transmission log and
reception log.
The Activity Report is printed automatically, allowing you to print the transmission log, reception log, or both of the transmission and reception log each
as needed.
Printing interval can be selected from [Daily], [Every 100 Comm.], [100/Daily]
in Administrator Settings of the Utility menu.
If you have specified the output timing of activity reports to [Daily] or
[100/Daily], specify the report output times accordingly.
Press [Job List]>[Job Details]>[Send]>[Job History]>[Comm. List]>[Fax TX
List] or [Fax RX List] to print the following reports.
• TX Report
• RX Report
• Activity Report
TX Result Report
[G3][I-FAX][IP]
The result of transmission is printed automatically. Select the print timing
from ON, If TX Fails, or OFF in Administrator Settings of the Utility menu.
Polling TX Report
[G3]
The result of polling transmission is printed automatically if [TX Result Report] is set to [ON] or [If TX Fails] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.
Polling RX Report
[G3]
The result of polling reception is printed automatically if [TX Result Report] is
set to [ON] or [If TX Fails] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.
Sequential Polling RX
Report
[G3]
The result of polling transmission to multiple destinations is printed automatically if [Sequential TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility
menu.
Broadcast Report
[G3][I-FAX][IP]
This report is printed automatically upon completion of a sequential broadcast transmission if [Sequential TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]
of the Utility menu.
Reservation Communication Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when a transmission is reserved if [Timer
Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.
Reservation Polling TX
Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when a polling transmission is reserved if
[Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility
menu.
Broadcast Reserved Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmission is reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.
An address Polling Rx
Reserved Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when a polling to a single destination is
reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]
in the Utility menu.
Sequence Polling Rx Reserved Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when a polling to multiple destinations is
reserved if [Timer Reservation TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings]
of the Utility mode.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-3
8
8.1.2
Types of reports and lists
8.1
Report name
Description
Confidential RX Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically upon reception of a confidential document if [Confidential RX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility
mode.
Polling TX Report (Bulletin TX Report)
[G3]
The result of transmission to the bulletin board is printed automatically if [Bulletin TX Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.
Relay TX Result Report
[G3]
The result of relay distribution is printed automatically if [Relay TX Result Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu.
Relay Request Report
[G3]
The result of relay RX is printed automatically if [Relay Request Report] is set
to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.
PC-Fax TX Error Report
[G3]
This report is printed automatically when an error occurs during PC-Fax
transmission if [PC-Fax TX Error Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of
the Utility menu.
Network Fax RX Error
Report
[I-FAX][IP]
This report is printed when an error occurs during reception of network fax if
[Network Fax Function RX Error Report] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of
the Utility menu.
Print MDN Message
[I-FAX]
If [MDN Message] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] in the Utility menu, an
MDN message is printed automatically when receiver respond to the sender's delivery confirmation request. (MDN is an abbreviation of Message Disposition Notifications.)
Print DSN Message
[I-FAX]
If [DSN Message] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu, a DSN
message is printed automatically when sender receives the message send
back from receiver's mail server upon reception of an E-mail. (DSN is an abbreviation of Delivery Status Notifications)
E-Mail Message Body
[I-FAX]
The text of the received E-mail message is printed automatically if [Print Email Message Body] is set to [ON] in [Report Settings] of the Utility menu.
Lists
To print a list, instruct the machine to print as needed.
8-4
List name
Description
Address Book List
Print the details of the address book entries.
Group List
The details of the group entries can be printed.
Program List
The details of the program destination entries can be printed.
Job Settings List
The details of the fax setting in the Utility mode can be printed.
E-Mail Subject/Text List
Print the subjects and texts of the registered E-mail message.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.2
Common lists
8.2
Common lists
8.2.1
Address Book List
8
The list of the address book entries can be printed.
How to print
1
Select [Address Book List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box
Registration List] in Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the
destination type, and then press [Print].
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].
Print sample
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-5
8
Common lists
8.2
Information included in the list
Information included in the list varies depending on the type of address book.
FAX
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
G3 FAX
Registered fax number.
Line Settings
* appears if the line setting is configured.
Machine Type of Destination
Registered recipient's machine type (monochrome/color machine).
Port Number
Registered port number.
SIP Fax
This machine does not support SIP fax.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
Internet Fax
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
Internet Fax Address
Registered Internet fax address.
Compression Type
Registered compression type.
Paper Size
Registered paper size.
Resolution
Registered resolution.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
IP Address Fax
8-6
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
IP Address
IP address, host name, or E-mail address that is registered.
Machine Type of Destination
Registered recipient's machine type (monochrome/color machine).
Port Number
Registered port number.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.2
8
Common lists
SMB
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
Host Address
Registered PC address.
File Path
Registered file path.
User ID
Registered user ID.
Password
Registered password. (The password is indicated by "********".)
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
E-mail
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
E-Mail Address
Registered E-mail address.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
FTP
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
Host Address
Registered PC address.
File Path
Registered file path.
User ID
Registered user ID.
Password
Registered password. (The password is indicated by "********".)
anonymous
Whether to allow anonymous users to access or not is displayed.
PASV
Whether the PASV mode is enabled or not is displayed.
Proxy
Whether to use a proxy server or not is displayed.
Port Number
Registered port number.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-7
8
Common lists
8.2
WebDAV
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
Host Address
Registered PC address.
File Path
Registered file path.
User ID
Registered user ID.
Password
Registered password. (The password is indicated by "********".)
Proxy
Whether to use a proxy server or not is displayed.
SSL Settings
Whether to use SSL or not is displayed.
Port Number
Registered port number.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
User Box
8-8
Item
Description
No.
Address book registration number (One touch number).
* (Index)
Index characters used for search.
Name
Name representing the registered destination.
User Box Number
Registered User Box number.
Apply Level/Referable
Group
Registered access allowed level.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.2
8.2.2
Common lists
8
Group List
Prints the list of the group entries registered.
How to print
1
Select [Group List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Registration List]
in Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the destination type,
and then press [Print].
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].
Print sample
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-9
8
Common lists
8.2
Information included in the list
8.2.3
Item
Description
No.
Group number.
Name
Name representing the registered group.
Speed Dial
Address book registration number (One touch number) registered for the
group.
Access Allowed Level
Registered access allowed level.
Regist Count
The number of address book registration numbers (One Touch numbers)
registered for the group.
Program List
Prints the list of the program destination entries registered.
How to print
8-10
1
Select [Program List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box Registration] in
Administrator Settings, specify the starting number, the number of entries, and the destination type,
and then press [Print].
2
Configure the Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.2
8
Common lists
Print sample
Information included in the list
Item
Description
No.
Program destination number.
Name
Name representing the program group registered.
Address Book
Address book registration number.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-11
8
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8.3
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8.3.1
Activity Report
8.3
This report contains the transmission and reception log. The report can contain up to 700 records in total,
and in separate pages for transmission log and reception log. The Activity Report is printed automatically.
Also, only the transmission log (TX Report), reception log (RX Report) or both of the transmission and
reception log (Activity Report) can be printed as needed.
Print sample
8-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.3
8
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
Information included in the list
Item
Description
No.
Serial numbers assigned to transmission and receptions respectively.
Addressee
One of the followings is printed. This column is left blank if no information is
available.
TX Report: name registered in the address book or program
RX Report: name registered in the address book or Phone number of the recipient
Start Time
The starting time of the communication.
Time
The duration of the communication.
Prints
The number of transmitted/received document pages. For memory transmission, the number of pages transmitted successfully and the total number of
pages are printed as a factional number.
Note
One of the followings is printed.
L1: Main line (G3 only)
L2: Sub line (G3 only)
TMR: Timer TX
POL: Polling
ORG: Original size specified
FME: Frame erase
MIX: Sent by mixed original mode
CALL: Manual transmission
CSRC: Remote diagnosis
FWD: Forward
PC: PC-FAX
BND: Binding Position
SP: Special original
FCODE: F-Code specified
RTX: Re-transmission
RLY: Relay
MBX: Confidential
BUL: Bulletin board
SIP: This machine does not support SIP fax.
IP ADR: IP Address Fax
I-FAX: Internet Fax
Result
OK: Printed if the communication is complete successfully.
S-OK: Printed if the communication is interrupted.
PW-OFF: Printed if the power switch is turned off during communication.
TEL: Printed if the machine receives a phone call.
NG: Printed if a communication error occurs.
Continue: Printed if a transmission error has occurred and the job is put in a
queue for retransmission (error page redial).
No Response: Printed if no response is returned from the recipient.
Busy: Printed if the recipient's line is busy and the communication failed.
Memory Full: Printed if a fax could not be received because the memory was
full.
POVR: The upper limit of received pages is exceeded. This message is printed if the number of document pages to be received exceeds 3000. (IP Address Fax, Internet Fax)
FIL: File error. Printed if the machine does not support the received file format. (IP Address Fax, Internet Fax)
DC: Decoding error. Printed if decoding error occurs in the received file. (IP
Address Fax, Internet Fax)
MDN: Printed if the MDN response fails. (Internet Fax)
DSN: Printed if the DSN response fails. (Internet Fax)
LOVR: Printed if the length of document page to be received exceeds 1000
mm. (IP Address Fax, Internet Fax)
Reference
In the remarks column, you can print a user name when user authentication is enabled, or account
name when account track is enabled. For details, refer to page 10-29.
Some of the items may not be printed depending on the option settings.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-13
8
8.3.2
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8.3
TX Result Report
The result of transmission is printed automatically. Select the print timing from ON, If TX Fails, or OFF in
Administrator Settings of the Utility menu.
8.3.3
Broadcast Report
Printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmission is completed.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Sequential TX Report] in the Utility menu. In addition,
you can specify the printing timing (All Destinations/Each Destination) in [Broadcast Result Report].
8.3.4
Job Settings List
Print the job settings list of this machine.
How to print
%
8-14
Select [Fax Settings] - [Job Settings List] in Administrator Settings, and configure the Paper Tray and
Simplex/Duplex settings, and then press [Start].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.3
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8
Fax Setting List
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-15
8
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8.3
Relay List
8-16
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.3
Reports/lists commonly used among G3/IP/I-FAX
8
Sender (TSI) RX User Box
Confidential/Bulletin List
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-17
8
Report printed for G3 fax
8.4
Report printed for G3 fax
8.4.1
Polling TX Report
8.4
The result of polling transmission is printed automatically.
You can select ON, If TX Fails, or OFF from [TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.2
Polling RX Report
Printed automatically when a polling document is received.
You can select ON, If TX Fails, or OFF from [TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.3
Sequential Polling RX Report
The result of polling to multiple destinations is printed automatically.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Sequential TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8-18
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.4
8.4.4
Report printed for G3 fax
8
Reservation Communication Report
Printed automatically when a timer transmission is specified.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.5
Reservation Polling TX Report
Printed automatically when a polling transmission is reserved (when a document is saved in the Polling
Transmission User Box of this machine).
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.6
Broadcast Reserved Report
Printed automatically when a sequential broadcast transmission is reserved.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-19
8
8.4.7
Report printed for G3 fax
8.4
An address Polling Rx Reserved Report
Printed automatically when a polling reception to single destination is reserved.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.8
Sequence Polling Rx Reserved Report
Printed automatically when a polling reception to multiple destinations is reserved.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Timer Reservation TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.9
Confidential RX Report
Printed automatically when a confidential document is received.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Confidential Rx Report] in the Utility menu.
8-20
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.4
8.4.10
8
Report printed for G3 fax
Bulletin TX Report (Polling TX Report)
Printed automatically when a polling transmission is executed to the document saved in the bulletin board.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Bulletin TX Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.11
Relay TX Result Report
This report is printed automatically upon transmission of a document to the relay distribution destination
when this machine functioned as the relay distribution station.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Relay TX Result Report] in the Utility menu.
8.4.12
Relay Request Report
When this machine is used as the relay distribution station, this report is printed automatically upon reception
of a document from the relay instruction station.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Relay Request Report] in the Utility menu.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-21
8
8.4.13
Report printed for G3 fax
8.4
PC-Fax TX Error Report
Printed automatically when an error occurs in PC-FAX transmission.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [PC-Fax TX Error Report] in the Utility menu.
8-22
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.5
8
Report printed for Internet Fax
8.5
Report printed for Internet Fax
8.5.1
Internet Fax RX Error Report
Printed automatically when the reception of Internet Fax or IP Address Fax fails.
You can enable or disable this report to be printed in [Network Fax RX Error Report] in the Utility menu.
8.5.2
Print MDN Message
When the sender (this machine) requests the recipient's machine to confirm that the E-mail message is
unsealed, the receiver sends an MDN message to the sender upon unsealing (printing) of the E-mail message.
When this machine receives an MDN response message, and prints automatically.
You can specify whether to print or not in [MDN Message] in the Utility menu.
8.5.3
Print DSN Message
A DSN message is returned from the receiver to the sender when the E-mail message is delivered to the
receiver's mail server. When this machine receives the DSN message, it is printed automatically. (DSN is an
abbreviation of Delivery Status Notifications)
You can specify whether to print or not in [DSN Message] in the Utility menu.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-23
8
8.5.4
Report printed for Internet Fax
8.5
Print E-mail Message Body
Specify whether to print the body of the received E-mail message automatically or not.
You can specify whether to print or not in [Print E-mail Message Body] in the Utility menu.
Reference
Even if [Print E-mail Message Body] is set to [ON], the body of the received E-mail message is not
printed if "Content-XCIAJWNETFAX:IGNORE" is included in the header, or there is no text in the body.
If the received attachment file is prohibited for printing, this machine behaves according to the [Network
Fax RX Error Report] setting.
8.5.5
E-Mail Subject/Text List
Print the list of the subjects and texts of the registered E-mail message.
How to print
%
8-24
Select [E-Mail Subject/Text List] from [One-Touch/User Box Registration] - [One-Touch/User Box
Registration List] in Administrator Settings, configure Paper Tray and Simplex/Duplex settings, and then
press [Start].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8.6
Report printed for IP
8
Print sample
8.6
Report printed for IP
8.6.1
Network Fax RX Error Report
For details, refer to page 8-23.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
8-25
8
8-26
Report printed for IP
8.6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9
User Mode Settings
9.1
9
Menu trees in User mode
9
User Mode Settings
9.1
Menu trees in User mode
The following setting items are available from the Utility (User mode). The menu tree contains the items that
relate to Network Scan, G3 Fax and Network Fax.
9.1.1
One-Touch/User Box Registration
First level
Second level
Third level
Fourth level
1 Create OneTouch Destination
1 Address Book
(Public)
1 E-Mail (p. 9-7)
1/2
No.
Name
E-Mail Address
2/2
Index
Icon
2 User Box (p. 9-9)
No.
Name
User Box
Index
Icon
3 Fax (p. 9-10)
1/2
No.
Name
Fax Number
Line Settings
2/2
Index
Icon
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-3
9
Menu trees in User mode
First level
Second level
Third level
Fourth level
1 Create OneTouch Destination
1 Address Book
(Public)
4 PC (SMB) (p. 9-12)
1/3
9.1
No.
Name
User ID
Password
2/3
Host Address
File Path
3/3
Reference
Index
Icon
5 FTP (p. 9-14)
1/3
No.
Name
Host Address
File Path
2/3
User ID
Password
anonymous
PASV
Proxy
Port Number
3/3
Index
Icon
6 WebDAV (p. 9-16)
1/3
No.
Name
User ID
Password
2/3
Host Address
File Path
3/3
Proxy
SSL Settings
Port Number
Index
Icon
7 IP Address Fax
(p. 9-18)
1/2
No.
Name
IP Address
2/2
Port Number
Destination Machine
Type
Index
Icon
9-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.1
9
Menu trees in User mode
First level
Second level
Third level
Fourth level
1 Create OneTouch Destination
1 Address Book
(Public)
8 Internet Fax
(p. 9-19)
1/2
No.
Name
E-Mail Address
2/2
RX Ability (Destination)
Index
Icon
3 Group (p. 9-20)
Name
Select Group
Icon
4 E-Mail Settings
1 E-Mail Subject (p. 9-21)
2 E-mail Body (p. 9-21)
3 Limiting Access
to Destinations
1 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations (p. 9-24)
1 Address Book (p. 9-24)
2 Group (p. 9-25)
3 Program (p. 9-25)
9.1.2
User Settings
First level
Second level
Third level
2 Custom Display
Settings
2 Scan/Fax Settings (p. 9-26)
1/2
Fourth level
Default Tab
Program Default
Address Book Index Default
Shortcut Key 1
Shortcut Key 2
2/2
Default Address Book
Default Address Type
5 FAX Active Screen (p. 9-27)
TX Display
RX Display
8 Search Option Settings (p. 9-28)
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-5
9
Menu trees in User mode
First level
Second level
4 Scan/Fax Settings (p. 9-28)
1/2
Third level
9.1
Fourth level
JPEG Compression Level
Black Compression Level
TWAIN Lock Time
Default Scan/Fax Settings
2/2
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level
Color TIFF Type
Graphic Outlining
9.1.3
Recalling or registering Scan/Fax programs
First level
Second level
Register Program
(p. 9-22)
Name
Third level
Fourth level
Address
URL Notif. Destination
Check Program
Settings (p. 9-23)
Check Address
Check Scan Settings
Check Original Settings
Communication Settings
Check E-Mail Settings
Check URL Notif. Destination
Delete (p. 9-23)
9-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9.2
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
A maximum of 2,000 destinations can be registered with the address book.
Reference
If "Registering and Changing Addresses" is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings, register these
destinations using "One-Touch/User Box Registration" in Administrator Settings.
9.2.1
Displaying the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen
To display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen, press the [Utility/Counter] key on the control panel
and then select [One-Touch/User Box Registration] from the Utility menu that appears.
Reference
An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. To
select [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press [1] on the keypad.
9.2.2
Address Book - E-Mail
E-mail addresses can be registered. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/2 page
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-7
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
2/2 page
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to Enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
E-Mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the destination via the touch panel.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
If user authentication settings are configured, press [Me] that appears in the [Address Book] tab to allow
you to easily send scanned data to your E-mail address (E-mail address in user registration information).
For details, refer to page 5-21.
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
9-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9.2.3
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Address Book - User Box
Register destinations at which to save documents in a User Box. To register a new destination, press [New].
To register a destination at which to save documents in a User Box, the User Box must be registered in
advance. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
User Box
Select one User Box you want to save the destination in.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-9
9
9.2.4
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Address Book - Fax
Register fax destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/2 page
2/2 page
Item
Description
No.
Press [No], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any
number to register the smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the
address book using up to 24 characters.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number for the destination using the keypad up
to 38 digits.
• When the PBX connection is enabled and a call is made
from the internal line to the outside line, press [Pause] after
the outside line number such as "0" so that dialing is made
more surely. "P" is displayed on the screen.
• When the PBX connection is enabled, [Outside] is displayed on the screen. When you select it, an [E-] is displayed.
• If "Confirm Address (Register)" is ON, a screen for entering
the fax number again appears after you press [OK]. Enter
the fax number and then press [OK].
d Reference
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer
to page 10-23.
9-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Item
Description
Line Settings
Configure the line that is used to send faxes.
Overseas TX
The transmission rate is set to a lower level when having a poor
communication.
ECM OFF
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is cancelled to shorten the transmission time.
This is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International
Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature
communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is
free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from
disturbances due to line noises, etc.
V34 OFF
V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. There are cases when the communication is not possible in super G3 mode depending on the telephone line
conditions when the recipient's machine or this machine is
connected to the line via a private branch exchange.
In such cases, we recommend that you transmit a fax by selecting V34 OFF to disable the super G3 mode. The V34 mode
is resumed automatically on completion of transmission.
Check Dest. &
Send
When sending a fax job, a specified fax number is compared
with receiver's fax number information (CSI) and, if they match,
a fax is sent. A mismatch results in a transmission error occurs.
This prevents misdirected transmissions.
• To check the destination and send, the fax number of this
machine must be registered with the recipient's fax machine.
Select Line
If two fax expansion kits are installed, you can select [Line 1]
or [Line 2] to send a fax. Specify the line used for sending faxes.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the
index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This
allows you to find it more easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that
is available when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-11
9
9.2.5
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Address Book - PC (SMB)
Register PC (SMB) destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/3 page
2/3 page
3/3 page
9-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
User ID
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel
(up to 127 characters).
• If user authentication settings have been applied, you can avoid registering a password on the screen for registering a new PC (SMB) destination
and enhance security by using the user ID and password included in user
registration information. If this is the case, leave the User ID and Password boxes blank. In addition, set "Scan to Authorized Folder Settings"
in Administrator Settings to "Limit". For details on setting this function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Password
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch
panel (up to 14 characters).
Host Address
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for
the destination computer.
The host name must be less than 255 characters in length.
• If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host
name is cleared.
• If you enter an IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP address is cleared.
• Host name and file path must be specified in uppercase.
• To perform SMB transmission using an IPv6 address, set the Direct Hosting to "ON". For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
File Path
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 255
bytes).
Reference
Allows you to detect a computer on the network and register a shared folder
as a destination.
• If the number of computers or workgroups on the network (subnet) to
which this machine is connected exceeds the value shown below, the
structure of the folders may not be properly reference.
Workgroups: 512
Computers: 512
The structure of the folders cannot be referenced in the IPv6 environment.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
If Active Directory is used for user authentication, press [Home] that appears on the touch panel to allow
you to easily send scanned data to your own Home folder. For details, refer to page 5-22.
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-13
9
9.2.6
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Address Book - FTP
Register FTP destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/3 page
2/3 page
3/3 page
9-14
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
Host Address
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for
the destination server.
The host name must be less than 63 characters in length.
• If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host
name is cleared.
• If you enter the IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP address is saved and displayed in the input screen.
• Before entering the host name, check that the DNS settings are correctly
specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
File Path
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 127
bytes).
User ID
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel
(up to 63 bytes).
Password
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch
panel (up to 63 characters).
anonymous
If you do not want to specify the user ID for logging in to the host using the
host name, press [ON].
PASV
Select whether to use the PASV mode.
Proxy
Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
Port Number
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-15
9
9.2.7
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Address Book - WebDAV
Register WebDAV destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/3 page
2/3 page
3/3 page
9-16
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
User ID
Enter the user ID for logging into the destination computer via the touch panel
(up to 63 bytes).
Password
Enter the password for logging into the destination computer via the touch
panel (up to 63 characters).
Host Address
Enter the host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address as the host address for
the destination server.
The host name must be less than 63 characters in length.
• If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host
name is cleared.
• If you enter the IP address and then press [Input Host Name], the IP address is saved and displayed in the input screen.
• Before entering the host name, check that the DNS settings are correctly
specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
File Path
Enter the destination file path for saving data via the touch panel (up to 142
bytes).
Proxy
Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
SSL Settings
Select whether to enable SSL.
Port Number
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-17
9
9.2.8
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Address Book - IP Address Fax
Register IP address fax destinations. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/2 page
2/2 page
9-18
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
Destination
Enter the host name, IPv4 address, IPv6 address or E-mail address, as the
host address for the destination device.
The host name or E-mail address must be less than 317 characters in length.
• If you enter a host name and then select to enter an IP address, the host
name is cleared.
• Before entering the host name or E-mail address, check that the DNS settings are correctly specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Port Number
Enter the port number (any number between 1 and 65535).
Destination Machine
Type
Select [Color] or [Monochrome] depending on the recipient's machine type.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
9.2.9
Address Book - Internet Fax
Register Internet fax addresses. To register a new destination, press [New].
1/2 page
2/2 page
Item
Description
No.
Press [No.], and then enter the registration number of the destination between 1 and 2,000. Press [OK] without entering any number to register the
smallest number available.
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
E-Mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the destination via the touch panel.
RX Ability (Destination)
Select the items for which the recipient machine can receive for compression
type, paper size and resolution.
Index
Select the index. For a frequently used destination, specify the index characters and select [Favorites] at the same time. This allows you to find it more
easily.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-19
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Reference
To check a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Check Job Set].
To change the settings for a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press[Edit].
To delete a registered destination, select its registered name, and then press [Delete].
9.2.10
Registering groups
You can register one or more destinations as a group.
Up to 100 groups (00-99) can be registered for Fax/Scan function.
Up to 500 one-touch destinations can be registered in one group destination.
To register a group, press [New].
9-20
Item
Description
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the name to be registered in the address book
using up to 24 characters.
Select Group
Select a destination type, and then select the destination to be registered in
a group.
Icon
Select an icon.
• The selected icon is used for the image panel function that is available
when the optional function code "CAA" is enabled.
Check Program Settings
Allows you to view a list of one-touch destinations registered in a group.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9.2.11
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9
Registering E-mail setting subjects (E-mail/I-FAX)
Up to 10 E-mail subjects and Internet fax subjects (Subject) can be registered. A desired text string can be
selected from those registered when sending. To register a new subject, press [New].
Item
Description
Subject
Enter a subject using up to 64 characters.
Reference
To check a registered subject, select it, and then press [Check Job Settings].
To change the settings for a registered subject, select the subject to be changed, and then press [Edit].
To delete a registered subject, select the subject to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
To set a subject as the default, select the subject, and then press [Set as Default].
9.2.12
Registering an E-mail setting text (E-mail/I-FAX)
Up to 10 E-mail and Internet fax text strings (Subject) can be registered. A desired text string can be selected
from those registered when sending. To register a new text string, press [New].
Item
Description
Body
Enter a text using up to 256 characters.
Reference
To check a registered text string, select the string, and then press [Check Job Settings].
To change the settings for a registered text string, select the string, and then press [Edit].
To delete a registered text string, select the text string, and then press [Delete].
To set a text string as the default, select the string, and then press [Set as Default].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-21
9
9.2.13
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Registering a scan/fax program
You can register destinations to which faxes are frequently sent as programs together with Scan, Original,
and Communication Settings. If these are registered as programs, you can call a registered set of the
destination and its Scan, Original, and Communication Setting by simply pressing the [Mode Memory] key.
Reference
Up to 400 normal programs and up to 10 "temporary programs" can be registered as programs.
If 410 programs have been already registered, delete unnecessary programs before registering new
ones.
Registering programs
1
Press the [Fax/Scan] key on the control panel and then configure Scan Settings, Original Settings and
Communication Settings for which you want to register them as a program.
2
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
3
Select an unregistered program button, and then press [Register Program].
The Register Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
9-22
Item
Description
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the program name using up to 24 characters.
Address
Allows you to select one destination. Select a destination from Address Book
or enter it directly.
• If "Confirm Address (Register)" is ON, a screen for entering a fax number
again appears after you specify a fax destination in the [Direct Input] tab
and press [OK]. Enter the fax number and then press [OK].
• For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-23.
URL Notif. Destination
Allows you to specify the destination to be notified by E-mail when a User
Box in the main unit, FTP, SMB or WebDAV job has finished. Select a destination from Address Book or enter it directly.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
9
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Check Job Set.
Press this key to check the contents of a registered program. After checking them, press [Close].
Item
Description
Check Address
Allows you to check the specified address.
Check Scan Settings
Allows you to check the scan settings configured for the program.
Check Original Settings
Allows you to check the original settings configured for the program.
Communication Settings
Allows you to check the communication settings configured for the program.
Check E-Mail Settings
Allows you to check the E-Mail settings configured for the program.
Check URL Notif. Destination
Allows you to check the URL notification settings configured for the program.
RX Ability (Destination)
Allows you to check the reception capability of the recipient configured for
the program.
Delete
Press to delete a registered program. To delete, press [Delete].
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-23
9
9.2.14
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9.2
Create User Box - Confidential User Box (G3)
To create a User Box for confidential reception, configure the Confidential RX settings when creating a Public
or Personal User Box.
d Reference
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
9.2.15
Create User Box - Bulletin Board User Box (G3)
d Reference
For details on creating Bulletin Board User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
9.2.16
Create User Box - Relay User Box (G3)
d Reference
For details on creating the Relay User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
9.2.17
Limiting Access to Destinations - Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations
Apply a reference permission level to a destination. Log in as a user with the level that you want to apply, and
then change the level of the destination.
Reference
The initial level for a newly created destination is "0".
You cannot apply a group or a level higher than the level of the user you are logged in with.
To apply a group, you must register in Administrator Settings the destinations to be added to the group
in advance. For details on the reference allowed groups, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Address Book
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify
the level.
9-24
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.2
One-Touch/User Box Registration
9
Group
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify
the level.
Program
Select a destination whose level you want to change, and then press [Apply Group] or [Apply Level] to specify
the level.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-25
9
User Settings
9.3
User Settings
9.3.1
Displaying the User Settings screen
9.3
To display the User Settings screen, press the [Utility/Counter] key on the control panel, and then select [User
Settings] from the Utility menu that appears.
Reference
An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. To
select [2 User Settings], press [2] on the keypad.
9.3.2
Custom Display Settings - Scan/Fax Settings
Customize the Fax/Scan mode screen.
Configure the default tab of Fax/Scan mode screen the (Default: Address Book).
1/2 page
9-26
Item
Description
Default Tab
Configure the default tab of Fax/Scan mode screen the (Default: Address
Book).
Program Default
Configure the default Scan/Fax program screen (Default: PAGE1).
Address Book Index Default
Select a index type that appears in the [Address Book] tab (Default: Favorites).
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2
Allows you to register up to two shortcut keys for scan, original, or communication settings at the bottom of the screen.
• Two shortcut keys can be registered. If an optional image controller
IC-412 is installed, only one shortcut key can be registered.
• To delete the shortcut key, press [OFF].
• If Shortcut Keys 1 and 2 are configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed on the Scan/Fax screen.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.3
9
User Settings
2/2 page
9.3.3
Item
Description
Default Address Book
Select Index or Address Type as the way the registered destinations are displayed.
Default Address Type
When you set "Default Address Book" to "Address Type", select an address
type that is displayed as the default in the "Address Book" tab
Custom Display Settings - Fax Active Screen (G3/IP/I-FAX)
Customize the Fax Active screen.
Item
Description
TX Display
Specify whether to display a message indicating data being sent (Default:
No).
RX Display
Specify whether to display a message indicating data being received (Default: No).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-27
9
9.3.4
User Settings
9.3
Custom Display Settings - Search Option Settings
Configure the contents of the search option screen when performing an detail search for registered
destinations.
(E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV/G3/IP/I-FAX)
9.3.5
Item
Description
Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
Select whether to differentiate uppercase and lowercase letters when performing a search.
Search Option Screen
Select whether to display the search option screen when performing a detail
search. When you select "ON", the search option screen appears.
Scan/Fax Settings
1/2 page
9-28
Item
Description
JPEG Compression Level
(E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/
WebDAV/Web Service/IP)
Specify the compression level for saving images in full color.
• High Quality: Provides higher quality images, but the data size becomes
larger.
• Standard (default): Provides images of data size and quality of a mid-level
between "High Quality" and "High Compression".
• High Compression: Provides lower quality images, but the data size becomes smaller.
Black Compression Level
Specify the capability of the encoding method for sending binary (black and
white) images.
• MH: The data size is larger.
• MMR (default): The data size is smaller.
Data saved in MMR format may not be opened on your computer depending on the application.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9.3
9
User Settings
Item
Description
TWAIN Lock Time
Specify the length of time until the machine operations are unlocked during
scanning (excluding push scanning). (Default: 120 sec.)
• To use the machine as a scanner from an application using TWAIN, install
the "TWAIN" driver software designed for that purpose. For details, refer
to the TWAIN driver manual in the VL6522c series DVD.
• This function is not available if the optional image controller IC-412 is installed.
Default Scan/Fax Settings
Configure the default settings (settings selected when [Reset] is pressed) for
the Fax/Scan mode screen.
2/2 page
Item
Description
Compact PDF/XPS
Compression Level
(E-mail/Box/SMB/
FTP/WebDAV)
Specify the compression level for saving data in the compact PDF or XPS format.
• High Quality: Provides higher quality images, but the data size becomes
larger.
• Standard (default): Provides images of data size and quality of a mid-level
between "High Quality" and "High Compression".
• High Compression: Provides lower quality images, but the data size becomes smaller.
Color TIFF Type
(E-mail/Box/SMB/
FTP/WebDAV)
Select the compression level used for saving TIFF format data in color. If you
cannot open data saved with [TIFF (modified TAG)] selected, change your selection to [TIFF (TTN2)] (default).
Graphic Outlining
(E-mail/Box/SMB/
FTP/WebDAV)
This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when
creating an outline PDF.
Scanned document data is separated into text and image, and image is subjected to outline processing. Specify the level of outline processing from
[OFF] to [HIGH].
The outlining level becomes higher in the order of [LOW], [MIDDLE], and
[HIGH].
If [OFF] is specified, the image will not be outlined.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
9-29
9
9-30
User Settings
9.3
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10
Administrator Mode Settings
10.1
10
10
Configuration before use
Administrator Mode Settings
Configure Fax/Scan settings in the Administrator mode.
10.1
Configuration before use
10.1.1
E-mail
Before using E-mail transmission or Internet Fax, configure the following items. This section introduces basic
items. Also refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]" for details.
The E-mail address of the administrator
TCP/IP Settings
E-Mail TX (SMTP)
d Reference
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
10.1.2
User Box
Before saving data in User Boxes, configure the following items. For details on saving data in a User Box,
refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Create User Box
d Reference
For details on the procedure for configuring settings for it, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
10.1.3
SMB
Before using SMB transmission, configure the following items. This section introduces basic items. Also refer
to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]" for details.
TCP/IP Settings
SMB Client Setting
d Reference
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
10.1.4
FTP
Before using FTP transmission, configure the following items. This section introduces basic items. Also refer
to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]" for details.
TCP/IP Settings
FTP Settings
d Reference
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
10.1.5
G3 Fax
Before using G3 Fax, configure the following items.
Header Information
–
Refer to page 10-16.
Line Parameter Setting
–
Refer to page 10-18.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-3
10
10.1.6
Configuration before use
10.1
Internet Fax
Before using Internet Fax, configure the following items.
Network Fax Function Settings
Header Information
–
Refer to page 10-17.
Machine E-Mail Address
–
For details on the configuration procedure, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Machine Settings
–
For details on the configuration procedure, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
TCP/IP Settings
E-Mail Settings
d Reference
For details on Network Fax Function Settings, TCP/IP Settings and E-mail Settings, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Administrator]".
10.1.7
IP Address Fax
Before using IP Address Fax, configure the following items.
Network Fax Function Settings
Header Information
–
Refer to page 10-16.
TCP/IP Settings
SMTP transmission and reception settings
d Reference
For details on Network Fax Function Settings, TCP/IP Settings, and SMTP transmission and reception
settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
10-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.2
10.2
10
Menu tree in Administrator mode
Menu tree in Administrator mode
The following settings can be configured in Administrator Settings. The menu tree contains the items that
relate to Network Scan, G3 Fax and Network Fax.
10.2.1
System Settings
First level
1/2
2/2
Second level
Third level
1 Power Save
Settings
Enter Power Save Mode (p. 10-14)
2 Output Settings
1 Print/Fax Output
Settings
Fax (p. 10-14)
6 Restrict User
Access
3 Restrict Access
to Job Settings
(p. 10-9)
1/2
4 Restrict Operation (p. 10-10)
Restrict Broadcasting
9 Reset Settings
3 Job Reset
Next Job
2 Stamp Settings
1 Header/Footer Settings (p. 10-11)
Fourth level
Registering and Changing Addresses
Changing the "From" Address
Reset Data After
Job (p. 10-10)
2 Fax TX Settings (p. 10-15)
9 Advanced Preview Setting
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Original direction setting display (p. 10-12)
10-5
10
10.2.2
Menu tree in Administrator mode
10.2
Fax Settings
First level
Second level
1 Header Information (p. 10-16)
Sender
2 Header/Footer
Position (p. 10-17)
Header Position
Third level
Fourth level
Sender Fax No.
Print Receiver’s Name (European model only)
Footer Position
3 Line Parameter
Setting (p. 10-18)
1/3
Dialing Method
Receive Mode
Number of RX Call Rings
Number of Redials
2/3
Redial Interval
Line Monitor Sound
4 TX/RX Settings
(p. 10-20)
3/3
Line Monitor Sound Vol.
1/3
Duplex Print (RX)
Letter/Ledger over A4/A3
Print Paper Selection
Print Paper Size
Incorrect User Box No. Entry
2/3
Tray Selection for RX Print
Min. Reduction for RX Print
Print Separate Fax Pages
File After Polling TX
3/3
No. of Sets (RX)
Individual Receiving Line Setup *1
Individual Sender Line Setup *1
10-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.2
10
Menu tree in Administrator mode
First level
Second level
Third level
5 Function Settings
1 Function ON/OFF Setting
(p. 10-23)
1/2
Fourth level
F Code TX
Relay RX
Relay Printing
Destination Check Display Function
2/2
Confirm Address (TX)
Confirm Address (Register)
3 Memory RX Setting (p. 10-24)
4 Closed Network RX (p. 10-25)
5 Forward TX Setting
(p. 10-26)
Fax Line *2
Fax Line *2
7 Incomplete TX Hold (p. 10-27)
8 PC-Fax RX Setting
(p. 10-27)
Fax Line *2
9 TSI User Box Setting
(p. 10-28)
Fax Line 1*1
Fax Line *2
Action when TSI
User Box is not
set.
Print
TSI User Box
Registration
Fax Line 2*1
Action when TSI
User Box is not
set.
Print
TSI User Box
Registration
6 PBX Connection Setting (p. 10-29)
7 Report Settings
(p. 10-29)
1/3
Activity Report
TX Result Report
Sequential TX Report
Timer Reservation TX Report
Confidential RX Report
2/3
Bulletin TX Report
Relay TX Result Report
Relay Request Report
PC-Fax TX Error Report
Broadcast Result Report
3/3
TX Result Report Check
Network Fax RX Error Report (p. 10-38)
MDN Message (p. 10-39)
DSN Message (p. 10-39)
Print E-mail Message Body (p. 10-39)
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-7
10
Menu tree in Administrator mode
First level
Second level
Third level
10.2
Fourth level
8 Job Settings List (p. 10-31)
9 Multi Line Settings (p. 10-32)
1 Line Parameter Setting
(p. 10-32)
Dialing Method
Number of RX Call Rings
Line Monitor Sound
2 Function Settings
(p. 10-33)
PC-FAX TX Setting
3 Multi Line Settings (p. 10-33)
4 Sender Fax No. (p. 10-33)
0 Network Fax
Settings
1 Black Compression Level (p. 10-40)
2 Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method (p. 10-40)
4 Internet Fax Self RX Ability (p. 10-41)
5 Internet Fax Advanced Settings (p. 10-41)
6 IP Address Fax Operation Settings (p. 10-42
Reference
The mark "*1" is displayed if two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed.
The mark "*2" is displayed if two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line
Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings. For details on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to
page 10-37.
10.2.3
Security Settings
First level
Second level
4 Security Details
(p. 10-34)
1/3
Manual Destination Input
2/3
Restrict Fax TX
Hide Personal Information
Display Activity Log
Initialize
3/3
Job History Thumbnail Display
Copy Guard
Password Copy
10-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.3
10.3
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
10
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for E-mail Transmission, Save in User Box,
SMB, FTP and WebDAV.
10.3.1
Displaying the Administrator Settings screen
To display the Administrator Settings screen, press the [Utility/Counter] key on the control panel and then
select [Administrator Settings] from the Utility menu that appears. Enter the administrator password, and then
press [OK].
Reference
An item can also be selected by pressing the key on the keypad for the correspondent number. To
select [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press [1] on the keypad.
10.3.2
System Settings - Restrict User Access
Specify items for which access is restricted in the User mode.
Restrict Access to Job Settings
1/2 page
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-9
10
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
10.3
Item
Description
Registering and Changing Addresses
Specify whether to allow the users to register and change addresses.
Changing the "From"
Address (E-mail)
Specify the settings for changing the From address.
• [Allow]: Allows the user to change the From address.
• [Admin. E-mail Address]: The administrator's E-mail address is set to the
From address.
• [User Address Priority]: The user's E-mail address is set to the From address. If the user's E-mail address is not specified, the administrator's address is set. When User Authentication is enabled, the setting
automatically changes from [Allow] to [User Address Priority].
Restrict Operation
10.3.3
Item
Description
Restrict Broadcasting
Specify whether to allow the users to specify destinations to which to send
broadcast faxes.
System Settings - Reset Setting - Job Reset - Next Job - Reset Data After
Job
Specify whether to reset settings (such as scan setting) configured for sending faxes after sending jobs.
Reset All: Resets all settings.
Reset Destination Only: Resets only the destination settings.
Confirm with User: Displays a message to confirm that you want to clear the settings.
10-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.3
10.3.4
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
10
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Header/Footer Settings
Configure the settings for the header/footer to be inserted on all pages. You can use the settings for the
header/footer configured here for faxing, scanning and printing.
In the Header/Footer Setting window, press [New]. This brings up a screen that allows you to enter a new
header/footer.
Item
Description
Name
Use the touch panel to enter the header or footer name using
up to 16 characters.
Header Settings, Footer Settings
Specify whether to print the header and footer. Pressing [Print]
allows you to specify whether to print text, the date/time or
other information (distribution control number, job number or
serial number).
Text
Specify a header or footer string via the control panel.
Date/Time
Specify the date/time for the header/footer.
Other
Specify the details of the distribution control number, job
number, or serial number of the header or footer.
• The serial number is that attached to the machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
Pages
Text Details
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the
first page only.
Text Color
Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow,
cyan, or magenta.
Text Size
Select the size (8 pt/10 pt/12 pt/14 pt) in which text is printed.
Text Type
Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica.
10-11
10
10.3.5
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
10.3
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting
display
When sending a fax using the advanced preview, specify whether to display the screen for selecting the
direction of the original after pressing [Preview].
10.3.6
Security Settings - Security Details
Manual Destination Input
1/3 page
10-12
Item
Description
Manual Destination Input
Specify whether to allow manual destination input. If [Restrict] is selected, the
Direct Input tab does not appear. This makes it impossible to directly enter
destinations.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.3
Administrator Settings (E-mail/Box/SMB/FTP/WebDAV)
10
2/3 page
Item
Description
Hide Personal Information
Specify whether to include destinations in Job History on the Job List screen.
Display Activity Log
Specify whether to display fax transmission and reception history. If [OFF] is
selected, the history is not displayed.
Initialize
Allows you to select an object of which the data you want to clear.
When you select an object and then press [OK], a dialog box appears that
confirms you want to clear it.
Select [Yes], and then press [OK] to clear the data.
3/3 page
Item
Description
Job History Thumbnail
Display
Specify whether to display the first page for each job in the left-side pane
when a job history is selected with [Job History] on each tab that is displayed
when [Job List] - [Job Details] are selected.
Copy Guard
Specify whether to create and detect originals with copy guard patterns embedded.
• This item is available when the optional security kit SC-507 is installed.
Password Copy
Specify whether to create and detect originals with a password embedded.
• This item is available when the optional security kit SC-507 is installed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-13
10
10.4
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
Administrator Settings (G3)
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for G3 Fax TX. The descriptions in this
section also apply to Network Fax.
10.4.1
System Settings - Power Save Settings - Enter Power Save Mode
Select the condition on which the machine shifts to the power save mode.
Normal: When a fax is received during the power save mode, the fax job is printed. After a
predetermined time has elapsed, the machine shifts to the power save mode.
Immediately (default): When a fax is received during the power save mode, the fax job is printed and
then the machine immediately shifts to the power save mode.
10.4.2
System Settings - Output Settings - Print/Fax Output Settings - Fax
Specify the printing method for RX documents.
Batch Print (default): Printing is started after all documents are received.
Page Print: Printing is made each time a page of document is received.
10-14
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10.4.3
Administrator Settings (G3)
10
System Settings - Restrict User Access
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-9.
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-10.
10.4.4
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings
Specify whether to reset stamp settings configured for scanning faxes when sending faxes.
Cancel: Each page of the faxes is sent with no stamp settings applied.
Do Not Cancel: Each page of the faxes is sent with stamp settings applied.
10.4.5
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting
display
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-15
10
10.4.6
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
Fax Settings - Header Information
Register sender information and fax ID that are included in TX documents that is to be printed on documents
received by the recipient.
10-16
Item
Description
Sender
Allows you to register more than one sender name that is to be printed on
documents received by the recipient as sender information. Enter a text using up to 30 characters.
• To register a new sender, press [New].
• Possible to specify up to 20 types of views for senders.
• To change the settings for a registered sender, select the sender and then
press [Edit]. In the Edit screen, registered numbers cannot be changed.
• To delete a registered sender, select the sender to be deleted and then
press [Delete].
• To specify a sender as the default, select the sender and then press [Set
as Default].
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line
Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings, default value can be specified
for each line. Select the sender to specify as the default, and then press either
[Set as Default for Line 1] or [Set as Default for Line 2]. For details on [Individual Sender Line Setup], refer to page 10-20.
Sender Fax No.
The registered fax number is printed as the sender's information on the document received by the recipient. Enter a sender fax number using 0-9, *, #,
[+], and space (up to 20 characters).
• If two fax kit FK-502 are installed, register the sender fax number for each
of the two lines. To specify the fax ID of an extension line, refer to page
page 10-34.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10.4.7
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position
Specify the position on a page where sender information and fax ID that are printed on received documents.
Item
Description
Header Position
Specify the position of the sender information to be added on a fax document
sent from this machine. The added sender information is printed as a part of
the image on the document received by the recipient. If you select [OFF],
sender information will not be added.
Print Receiver's Name
Specify the items to be added as the sender information. (European model
only)
Footer Position
Specify the position of the reception information (reception time and reception number) to be printed on a document received by this machine. If you
select [OFF], reception information will not be printed.
The following indicates where to print sender information or reception information.
[Inside Body Text]: Sender information or reception information is added so that it is overlaid on part of
the original image before the fax is being sent.
From : MFP01
-
#138 P.001/001
[Outside Body Text]: Sender information or reception information is added to the outside of the original
image area before the fax is being sent.
From : MFP01
-
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22
#138 P.001/001
[OFF]: Sender information or reception information is not added.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-17
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
The following indicate how sender information is printed. (European model only)
[ON]: The sender name, destination fax number (To: xxxxx), transmission start date and time,
transmission number, and the number of pages are added as the sender information. (European model
only)
From : MFP01
-
#138 P.001/001
[OFF]: The sender name, fax ID of this machine, transmission start date and time, transmission number,
and the number of pages are added as the sender information.
From : MFP01
10.4.8
To:123456789 05/25/2006 13:22
987654321
05/25/2006 13:22 #138 P.001/001
Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting
Configure items related to fax transmission and reception.
1/3 page
Item
Description
Dialing Method
Select one of the following dialing methods.
• North American model (inch): PB/10pps
• European model (cm): PB
Receive Mode
Select a receive mode.
• [Auto RX]: Automatically receives faxes.
• [Manual RX]: If you expect frequent phone calls, for example if an external
telephone is connected to this machine, set this mode to Manual RX.
d Reference
For details on Auto RX, refer to page 6-3.
For details on Manual RX, refer to page 6-3.
10-18
Number of RX Call Rings
Set the number of incoming call rings in the range between 0 and 15 (Default:
2).
Number of Redials
Set the number of redials (for busy, no-answer, and so on) in the range between 0 and 7 (Default: 3 times).
Redial Interval
Set redial intervals in the range between 1 and 15 minutes (Default: 3 minutes).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
2/3 page
Item
Description
Line Monitor Sound
Set this item to ON to hear the line sound from a speaker during communication.
3/3 page
Item
Description
Line Monitor Sound Vol.
Set the volume level of the speaker in the range between 0 and 31 (Default:
16).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-19
10
10.4.9
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
Fax Settings - TX/RX Setting
Configure the handling of files for polling TX operations and printing method for RX operations.
1/3 page
Item
Description
Duplex Print (RX)
If Duplex Print (RX) is set to ON, the original received is printed on both sides
of the paper.
• If "Print Separate Fax Pages" is set to ON, this key does not appear.
Letter/Ledger over
A4/A3
Specify ON to select letter or ledger paper for printing received documents
priory to other paper size.
Print Paper Selection
•
•
•
Print Paper Size
Specify paper size for printing received documents. The initial setting varies
depending on the setting for "Letter/Ledger over A4/A3".
[Auto Select]: Print paper is automatically selected.
[Fixed Size]: Paper of the specified size is used for printing.
[Priority Size]: Paper of the size specified as the preferred size is used for
printing. If no preferred size is specified, paper of the closest size is used
for printing.
d Reference
To enable the setting for the print paper size, set "Tray Selection
for RX Print" to "Auto".
Incorrect User Box No.
Entry
10-20
Configure how the machine should react where an unregistered User Box
number is specified for fax RX using a User Box.
• [Print]: Prints received documents,
• [Show Error Message]:Handles the fax as a communications error.
• [Auto Create User Box]: Automatically creates a User Box with a specified
number and stores documents.
If "Password Rules" is set to ON, this item is not available.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
2/3 page
Item
Description
Tray Selection for RX
Print
If you want to fix the paper tray used to print received faxes, select the paper
try.
The available tray types vary depending on the options that are installed.
Min. Reduction for RX
Print
Specify the reduction ratio for received document to Full Size or a value between 87 and 96%.
• If the reduction ratio for printing is set to "Full Size", "Print Paper Selection" and "Tray Selection for RX Print" are set to "Auto (Select)". Or "Print
Separate Fax Pages" is set to "OFF".
Print Separate Fax Pages
If this item is set to ON, a document longer than the standard size is printed
on separate pages.
• "Print Separate Fax Pages" does not appear if "Duplex Print (RX)" is set
to ON.
File After Polling TX
Specify whether to delete the original after completing polling TX.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-21
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
3/3 page
3/3 page (If two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed)
10-22
Item
Description
No. of Sets (RX)
Set the number of copies for received documents to any number from 1 to
10 (Default: 1 set.).
Individual Receiving Line
Setup
Specify whether to configure the individual receiving line setup.
Displays if 2 units of the optional fax kit FK-502 are installed.
Individual Sender Line
Setup
Specify whether to configure the individual sender line setup.
Displays if 2 units of the optional fax kit FK-502 are installed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4.10 Fax Settings - Function Settings
Function ON/OFF Settings
1/2 page
Item
Description
F-Code TX
Specify whether to use F-Code TX.
• F-Code TX provides two methods: confidential transmission and relay
transmission.
d Reference
For details on confidential transmission, refer to page 7-5.
For details on relay transmission, refer to page 7-6.
Relay RX
Set this item to ON to enable the machine to send received documents as a
relay distribution station to relaying destinations. To use the relay distribution
function, you must register a Relay User Box.
d Reference
For details on registering the Relay User Box, refer to the "User's
Guide [Box Operations]".
Relay Printing
Specify whether to print documents received from a relay instruction station.
Destination Check Display Function
Specify whether to display the list of the specified destinations when sending
a fax.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-23
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
2/2 page
Item
Description
Confirm Address (TX)
(G3)
When specifying a fax destination with direct input, a screen appears
prompting you to enter the fax number again for confirmation. Entering the
fax number twice prevents one from entering incorrect destinations.
• When Confirm Address (TX) is enabled, you cannot specify a destination
using [Off-Hook]. You cannot specify the fax address using [Job History]
either.
Confirm Address (Register) (G3)
When the user specify a fax destination when the user registers a program,
configures the fax forwarding settings, or registers a one-touch destination,
the user must enter the destination twice for confirmation. By entering twice,
you can prevent the destination from being incorrectly entered.
Memory RX Setting
Specify whether to use Memory RX Setting function. To use the function, specify a password for print.
Press [No] to clear the entered setting and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to 8 digits)
The following screen is displayed if two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line
Setup] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings.
10-24
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
Administrator Settings (G3)
10
Press [Yes] and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to eight characters)
The following items are not available if Memory RX Settings are configured.
PC-Fax RX Settings
TSI User Box Settings
Forward TX Setting
Reference
For details on printing documents stored in a Memory RX User Box, refer to the "User's Guide [Box
Operations]."
You can also specify the registered group as the destination.
Closed Network RX
Specify whether to use the Closed Network RX function. To use the function, specify a password that is used
for Closed Network RX.
Press [No] to clear the entered setting and then specify a password using the keypad. (up to 4 digits)
Reference
Closed Network RX is only available when the receiver has password transmission function.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-25
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
Forward TX Setting
You can forward received documents to a preset recipient. The items that are to be configured are listed
below.
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in
Administrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line.
For details on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-37.
Item
Description
Output Method
Forward & Print: Received document are forwarded and printed on this machine.
Forward & Print (If TX Fails): Received documents are forwarded and, if forwarding fails, are printed on the machine.
Forward Dest.
Allows you to enter a fax number using up to 38 digits. It is also possible to
select it from the address book.
Select Line
If two units of fax kit FK-502 are installed, this setting can be specified for
each line.
The following items are not available if Forward TX Setting is configured.
PC-Fax RX Settings
TSI User Box Settings
Memory RX Setting
If "Confirm Address (Register)" is ON, a screen for entering the fax number again appears after you press
[OK]. Enter the fax number and then press [OK].
d Reference
For details on the Confirm Address function, refer to page 10-23.
10-26
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
Incomplete TX Hold
This function temporarily retains documents failed to be transmitted in the Fax Retransmit User Box even with
auto-redial due to a communications error or busy signals. To use Incomplete TX Hold function, specify the
amount of time for retaining files.
Reference
For details on faxing and printing documents saved in a Fax Retransmit User Box, refer to the "User's
Guide [Box Operations]".
PC-Fax RX Settings
Specify whether to use the PC-Fax RX function. To use the function, configure the following items.
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in
Administrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line.
For details on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-37.
Reference
The documents received by fax are saved in the TIFF format in a User Box.
d Reference
For details on PC-Fax RX, refer to page 7-3.
Item
Description
Receiving User Box Destination
You can specify destinations in a Memory RX User Box or a Specified User
Box. If "Specified User Box" is selected, destinations are saved in a User Box
specified with an F code subaddress.
Print
Specify whether to print a fax after receiving.
Password Check
Specify a communication password (up to 7 digits).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-27
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
TSI User Box Setting
Specify whether to use the TSI User Box function. To use the function, configure the following items.
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, and [Individual Receiving Line Setup] is set to [ON] in
Administrator Settings, you can select either [Fax Line 1] or [Fax Line 2] to configure settings for each line.
For details on [Individual Receiving Line Setup], refer to page 10-37.
d Reference
For details on the TSI User Box function, refer to page 7-4.
Item
Description
Action when TSI User Box is not set.
Configure how the machine should react when a specified
User Box is not found.
[Automatically Print]: Prints received documents.
[Memory RX User Box]: Saves received documents in a Memory RX User Box.
Print
Specify whether to print a received document after receiving.
TSI User Box Registration
Register destinations to which to distribute RX documents.
Up to 128 destinations can be registered. Select a desired
number, and then press [Edit].
TSI User Box Setting
Allows you to distribute received faxes to other fax machines
or User Boxes in this machine. Specify a sender's fax number
in [Sender (TSI)].
Specify a forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination].
To distribute received faxes to other fax machines, specify
destinations with [Select from Address Book]. To distribute
them to User Boxes in the machine, specify destinations with
[Search by User Box Number].
• A User Box for which confidential reception is enabled, and
a Relay User Box cannot be used for a forwarding destination.
Reference
You can also specify the registered group as the destination.
10-28
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4.11 Fax Settings - PBX Connection Setting
Specify the PBX line connection method.
If the PBX connection mode is enabled, specify an access code for an outside line. An access code refers to
a number used to connect to an outside line, such as a number beginning with a zero ("0").
Outside line numbers specified here are dialed, after which fax numbers registered with the address book or
program are dialed.
Press [No] to clear the entered settings, and then specify an access code (0 to 9999) using the keypad.
10.4.12 Fax Settings - Report Settings
Specify a way to output reports.
1/3 page
Item
Description
Activity Report
Configure output settings for Activity Report. To output the report, configure the following settings.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Output Settings
Specify the time when the report is to be output.
Daily: Outputs the report every day at a certain time.
Every 100 Comm.: Outputs the report for every 100 communication jobs.
100/ Daily: Outputs the latest 100 communication jobs every
day at a certain time.
Output Time Settings
Allows you to specify this item if "Daily" or "100/ Daily" is selected for Output Settings. Specify the time when to output the
report.
10-29
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
Item
Activity Report
10.4
Description
Print setting in remarks column
Specify the type of information printed in the remarks column
of activity reports.
[Print setting in remarks column] is displayed if user authentication or account track is enabled for this machine.
Normal Print: The line status or sending setting will be printed.
For details, refer to page 8-12.
Print user name: The user name for user authentication will be
printed.
Print account name: The account name for account track will
be printed.
TX Result Report
Configure the output settings for TX Result Report. Select output conditions.
Sequential TX Report
Configure the output settings for Sequential TX Report. Specify whether to output the report.
Timer Reservation TX Report
Configure the output settings for Timer Reservation TX Report.
Specify whether to output the report.
Confidential RX Report
Configure the output settings for Confidential RX Report.
Specify whether to output the report.
2/3 page
10-30
Item
Description
Bulletin TX Report
Configure the output settings for Bulletin TX Report. Specify whether to output the report.
Relay TX Result Report
Configure the output settings for Relay TX Result Report. Specify whether to
output the report.
Relay Request Report
Configure the output settings for Relay Request Report. Specify whether to
output the report.
PC-Fax TX Error Report
Configure the output settings for PC-Fax TX Error Report. Specify whether to
output the report.
Broadcast Result Report
Configure the output settings for Broadcast Result Report. Select a way to
output the report.
• With [Each Destination] selected, a broadcast result report is output only
when a transmission still fails after redial attempt. No report is output
when transmission is completed successfully.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
3/3 page
Item
Description
TX Result Report Check
Configure display settings for TX Result Report Check. Specify whether to
display the report.
10.4.13 Fax Settings - Job Settings List
This function outputs a list of settings related to faxes. Select a desired paper tray, and then press [Start].
Reference
For an example of output of a list of settings, refer to page 8-14.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-31
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
10.4.14 Fax Settings - Multi Line Settings
If two units of the fax kit FK-502 are installed, configure settings for the second line.
Line Parameter Setting
10-32
Item
Description
Dialing Method
Select one of the following for the dialing method of the extension line.
• North American model (inch): PB/10pps
• European model (cm): PB
Number of RX Call Rings
Set the number of incoming call rings in the range between 0 and 15 (Default:
2 x).
Line Monitor Sound
Set this item to ON to hear the line sound from a speaker during communication through the extension line.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
Function Settings
Item
Description
PC-FAX TX Setting
Specify the line to use for PC-FAX transmissions.
Multi Line Settings
Select the communication method for the extension line from three options: TX and RX, RX Only, and TX Only.
Sender Fax No.
Register a sender fax number for the extension line. The registered fax number is printed as the sender's
information on the document received by the recipient. Enter a sender fax number using 0-9, *, #, [+], and
[space] (up to 20 characters).
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-33
10
Administrator Settings (G3)
10.4
10.4.15 Security Settings - Security Details
Manual Destination Input
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Restrict Fax TX
Select whether to restrict fax transmissions. If [ON] is selected, the fax functions no longer appear on the
Scan/Fax screen.
Hide Personal Information
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Display Activity Log
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Initialize
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Job History Thumbnail Display
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Copy Guard
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
10-34
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.4
Administrator Settings (G3)
10
Password Copy
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-35
10
10.5
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10.5
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
This section describes administrator settings that are configured for Internet Fax and IP Address Fax.
10.5.1
System Settings - Power Save Setting - Enter Power Save Mode
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-5.
10.5.2
System Settings - Output Setting - Print/Fax Output Setting - Fax
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-5.
10.5.3
System Settings - Restrict User Access
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Registering and Changing Addresses
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-9.
Restrict Access to Job Settings - Change the "From" Address
The From address is used for the address configured for the device.
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-9.
Restrict Operation - Restrict Broadcasting
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-10.
10.5.4
System Settings - Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-5.
10.5.5
System Settings - Advanced Preview Setting - Original direction setting
display
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-5.
10-36
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.5
10.5.6
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10
Fax Settings - Header Information
Reference
For Internet Fax or IP Address Fax, sender information is not available for [Outside Body Text]. Even if
[Outside Body Text] is selected, sender information is added to the inside of the original.
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-6.
10.5.7
Fax Settings - Header/Footer Position
Reference
For IP Address Fax in the color mode, reception information is not available for [Outside Body Text].
Even if [Outside Body Text] is selected, sender information is added to the inside of the original.
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-6.
10.5.8
Fax Settings - Line Parameter Setting (IP)
Number of Redials
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-18.
Redial Interval
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-18.
10.5.9
Fax Settings - TX/RX Settings
Reference
To enable the setting for [Print Paper Size], set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto].
The available tray types vary depending on the options that are installed.
To receive a fax in the color mode, documents are always recorded in full size for IP address fax, and
recorded after being reduced to the appropriate print paper size for Internet fax.
To receive a fax in the color mode, Print Separate Fax Pages cannot be used.
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-6.
10.5.10 Fax Settings - Function Settings
Function ON/OFF Setting - Destination Check Display Function
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-23.
Memory RX Setting
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-24.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-37
10
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10.5
10.5.11 Fax Settings - Report Settings
Activity Report
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.
TX Result Report
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.
Sequential TX Report
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.
Broadcast Result Report
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.
TX Result Report Check
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-29.
Network Fax RX Error Report
Configure the output settings for the Network Fax RX Error Report. Specify whether to output the body.
10-38
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.5
10
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
MDN Message (I-FAX)
Configure the output settings for MDN messages in Network Fax. Specify whether to output the body.
DSN Message (I-FAX)
Configure the output settings for DSN messages in Network Fax. Specify whether to output the body.
Print E-mail Message Body (I-FAX)
Configure the output settings for body of successfully received E-mail. Specify whether to output the body.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-39
10
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10.5
10.5.12 Fax Settings - Job Settings List
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-6.
10.5.13 Fax Settings - Network Fax Settings
Configure the settings for Internet Fax and IP Address Fax.
Black Compression Level
Specify the device capabilities for fax transmissions when sending faxes with the file format selected to TIFF.
MMR (default): The data size is smaller.
MR: The data size is intermediate between MMR and MH.
MH: The data size is larger.
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method
Specify the device capabilities for fax transmissions when sending faxes with the file format selected to JPEG
or PDF.
JPEG (Color) (default): Compresses data in color JPEG format.
JPEG (Gray Scale): Compresses data in monochrome JPEG format.
Unset: Compresses data in the method specified in [Black Compression Level] while the sending
capability in the color or gray scale mode is disabled.
Reference
This setting is not reflected in Compact PDF since Compact PDF files are compressed using values
fixed to the machine.
If [Unset] is selected, data is converted to the TIFF format to be sent even if any file format has been
specified.
10-40
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.5
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10
Internet Fax Self RX Ability (I-FAX)
This item appears if the Internet fax function is available. When an MDN request is sent from a recipient
machine, the machine sends information that is configured for its own capabilities. Configure the settings for
the compression format, paper size and resolution.
Item
Description
Compression Type
Select the compression type of a fax job the machine can receive.
Paper Size
Select the paper size for a fax job the machine can receive.
Resolution
Select the resolution of a fax job the machine can receive.
Internet Fax Advanced Settings (I-FAX)
This item appears if the Internet fax function is available. You can configure detailed settings for Internet
faxes.
1/2 page
Item
Description
MDN Request
Specify whether to request for an MDN to the recipient machine when sending a fax.
• If both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to "Yes", the setting for
MDN Request is given priority.
DSN Request
Select whether to request for a DSN to the recipient machine when sending
a fax.
MDN Response
Select whether to respond to an MDN request from the recipient machine
when receiving a fax.
MDN/DSN Response
Monitoring Time
Specify whether to monitor DSN and MDN responses. To monitor them, enter the number of hours.
Maximum Resolution
Select the maximum resolution of the machine.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-41
10
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10.5
2/2 page
Item
Description
Add Content-Type Information
Specify whether to add Content-Type information to an Internet fax when
sending it.
If "Yes" is selected, "application=faxbw" is added to the Content-Type header of MIME as a sub type.
IP Address Fax Setting
Specify the operation mode for IP address fax.
Item
Description
[Mode 1]
This mode allows communication between Océ models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and between models compatible with the direct SMTP
standard defined by CIAJ. However, a unique method developed for Océ
models is used to transmit a color fax.
[Mode 2]
This mode allows communication between Océ models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and between models compatible with the direct SMTP
standard defined by CIAJ. The transmission and reception in color mode are
performed in the communication mode (Profile-C format) compatible with the
direct SMTP standard.
Sending and Receiving
of Colored Documents
Available when mode 2 is selected. To send a fax to a machine that does not
support color reception based on the direct SMTP standard, select [Restrict].
Reference
When selecting mode 2, check that the recipient's machine supports color reception based on the
direct SMTP standard.
CIAJ stands for Communications and Information network Association of Japan.
10-42
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10.5
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10
10.5.14 Security Settings - Security Details
Manual Destination Input
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Restrict Fax TX
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-34.
Hide Personal Information
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Display Activity Log
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Initialize
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Job History Thumbnail Display
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Copy Guard
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
Password Copy
d Reference
For the setting procedure, refer to page 10-12.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
10-43
10
10-44
Administrator Settings (IP/I-FAX)
10.5
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11
Web Connection
11.1
11
11
How to use Web Connection
Web Connection
This chapter explains functions of a device management utility "Web Connection".
11.1
How to use Web Connection
Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Start the
Web browser on the computer via the network; you can change the settings of this machine or check the
status of this machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the
control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters.
11.1.1
Operating environment
Operating environment
11.1.2
Network
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Applications on computer
Web browser:
<For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista>
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6/7 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
<For Macintosh MacOS 9.x/MacOS X>
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
<For Linux>
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
• Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® Player:
• Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format.
• Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility
(font/macro data management).
How to access
0
0
0
0
Start the Web browser to access Web Connection.
If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 11-11.
For details on setting the IP address for the printer, refer to "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 11-5.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
In the Address field, enter the IP address of this machine, and press the [Enter] key.
http://<IP address of this machine>/
Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20:
http://192.168.1.20/
When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer is used:
Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]) to access Web Connection.
–
http://[IPv6 address of this machine]/
Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16:
http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/
If IPv6 is set to "ON" while the Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16IPv6
IPv6_MFP_1" to the hosts file in advance, and specify the URL with the domain name.
The main menu or login page appears.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-3
11
11.1.3
How to use Web Connection
11.1
Cache function of Web browser
The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page
displayed using Web Connection. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using Web
Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser.
Reference
Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help
for the Web browser.
With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many
time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked,
and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again.
To avoid this problem, disable the cache function.
For Internet Explorer
1
Press "Internet Options" in the "Tools" menu.
2
In the "General" tab, select "Temporary Internet files" - [Settings].
3
Select "Every visit to the page", and click the [OK] button.
For Netscape Navigator
1
Press "Preferences" in the "Edit" menu.
2
In "Category" on the left, select "Advanced" - "Cache".
3
In "Document in cache is compared to document on network", select "Every time".
For Mozilla Firefox
11-4
1
Select "Options" in the "Tools" menu.
2
Select "Privacy", and then click the [Settings] button in the Private Data section.
3
Select the "Cache" check box under "Private Data" select the "Clear private data when closing Firefox"
check box under "Settings", and then click the [OK] button.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.2
Logging in and logging out
11.2
Logging in and logging out
11.2.1
Login and logout flows
11
Accessing with Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is
enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is
not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and
log in again.
When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled
You are automatically logged in as a public user.
The top menu page appears.
To log in as an administrator, log out once.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-5
11
Logging in and logging out
11.2
Login as an administrator again.
11-6
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.2
Logging in and logging out
11
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled
If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure.
The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in.
To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-7
11
Logging in and logging out
11.2
Log in again.
11.2.2
Logging out
When you click the [Logout] or [To Login Screen] button at the upper right of the window, a logoff confirmation
page appears. Click [OK] to return to the login page.
Reference
The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine.
When you are logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] is displayed. When you are logged in as a
registered user or administrator, [Logout] is displayed.
If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if
authentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will
automatically log out of the mode.
For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 11-24.
11-8
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.2
11.2.3
Logging in and logging out
11
Logging in
Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can
log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or
User Box administrator setting.
Reference
You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the
control panel. For details on the User Box administrator settings, permissions and password, refer to
the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
When you are logged in to the user mode as an administrator, you can perform job deletion processing,
which is not available in the administrator.
In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility,
refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Login options
You can select items as required when logging in.
Item
Description
Language
Select the language to display information in.
View Mode
Select Flash or HTML.
• To use the read-out software, select "HTML".
• In the IPv6 environment, select "HTML".
• To select "Flash", prepare Flash Player.
User Assist
Select the "Display dialog box in case of warning." check box to display the dialog
box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login.
Reference
If "Flash" is selected in "View Mode", the following items are displayed using Flash.
–
Status icons and messages
–
Status of "Paper Tray" in "Information - Device Information"
–
Status of "Job"
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-9
11
Logging in and logging out
11.2
Logging in as a public user
Login as a public user when User Authentication is not enabled in this machine. In the login page, select
"Public User", and press [Login].
11-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.2
Logging in and logging out
11
Logging in as a registered user
Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this
machine.
%
In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login].
Reference
If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password.
To select a user name from a list, press [User List].
If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server.
To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - "Administrator (User Mode)", and
enter the administrator password.
When Mode 2 is selected in "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator
Settings, if a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times, the user is locked, and
cannot use the control panel. For details on unlocking restricted operations, contact your administrator.
[User List] is available only when "User Name List" is set to "ON". For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Copy Operations]".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-11
11
Logging in and logging out
11.2
Logging in to administrator mode
To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode.
%
In the login page, select "Administrator", and click [Login].
% Enter the administrator password in the page that appears, and then click [OK].
Reference
To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and
enter the administrator password.
Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be able
to use it.
Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode.
When Mode 2 is selected in "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator
Settings, if you enter an incorrect password a specified number of times, you cannot log in to the
administrator mode. For details on the authentication setting, refer to the "User' s Guide [Copy
Operations]".
The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.
11-12
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.2
Logging in and logging out
11
Logging in as a User Box administrator
You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in
this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box
administrator is enabled using the control panel.
%
In the login page, select "Administrator", and click [Login].
% To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select "User Box Administrator", and enter
the User Box administrator's password.
Reference
To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and
enter the administrator password.
When Mode 2 is selected in "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator
Settings, if you enter an incorrect password a specified number of times, you cannot log in to the
administrator mode. For details on the authentication setting, refer to the "User' s Guide [Copy
Operations]".
The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings.
You can display the descriptions of functions (Help) if necessary. To display Help, select [Yes] in Display
Setting.
–
[On-Mouse View]: Points the cursor to display Help.
–
[On-Focus View]: Select this item to display Help.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-13
11
11.3
Page Configuration
11.3
Page Configuration
The window displayed by pressing an item in the top menu after logging in to Web Connection is configured
as follows. This example shows the items in Information - Device Information.
Reference
The contents of the Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or
the settings of this machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No.
11-14
Item
Description
1
Login user name
Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click
the user name to display the login user name.
2
Status display
Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine with icons and messages. Click the desired icon when an error
occurs to display the information (Consumables, Paper Tray, or user
registration page) associated with the icon, and you can check the
status.
3
Message display
Displays the operating status of this machine.
4
[To Login Screen]/[Logout]
Click to log out the current mode and log in again. When you are
logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] is displayed. When you
are logged in as a registered user or administrator, [Logout] is displayed.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.3
11
Page Configuration
No.
Item
Description
5
[Change Password]
Click to jump to the user password change page. This button appears only in the user mode page to which you are logged in as a
registered user.
6
Help
Click to display the page specified in the Online Help Website. For
the setting procedure, refer to page 11-16.
7
Refresh
Click to refresh the information displayed in the page.
8
Icon
Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons
are displayed in the user mode.
• Information
• Job
• User Box
• Direct Print
• Store Address
• Customize
9
Menu
Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that
appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected.
Information and settings
Displays the details of the item selected in the menu.
10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-15
11
11.4
User Mode Overview
11.4
User Mode Overview
When you are logged in to the user mode, you can configure the following functions.
11.4.1
Information
d Reference
For the other information about the user mode, refer to the Web Connection Help on the Utilities DVD-ROM.
11-16
Item
Description
Device Information
Allows you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of
this machine.
Online Assistance
Allows you to check the online assistance about this product.
Change User
Password
Allows you to change the password of the login user.
Function Permission Information
Allows you to check the function permission information about the user or account.
Network Setting
Information
Allows you to check the network settings of this machine.
Print Setting Information
Allows you to check the printer controller settings of this machine.
Print Information
Allows you to print font or configuration information.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.4
11.4.2
11
User Mode Overview
Job
Item
Description
Current Jobs
Allows you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs.
Job History
Allows you to check the executed jobs.
Communication
List
Allows you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-17
11
11.4.3
User Mode Overview
11.4
User Box
d Reference
For operating procedures on User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
11-18
Item
Description
Open User Box
Allows you to open the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User
Box) and print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change
the User Box setting.
Create User Box
Allows you to create new User Boxes.
Open System
User Box
Displayed when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. You can open the System
User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Memory RX, or Relay User Box) and handle a
document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting.
Create System
User Box
Displayed when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. You can create a new Bulletin Board or Relay User Box.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.4
11.4.4
11
User Mode Overview
Direct Print
Item
Description
Direct Print
Allows you to specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If
necessary, you can save the file to the User Box specified in the application settings.
Reference
[Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-19
11
11.4.5
User Mode Overview
11.4
Store Address
"Store Address" may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode.
11-20
Item
Description
Address Book
Allows you to view a list of the one-touch destinations registered with this machine
or to register or change destinations.
Group
Allows you to view a list of group destinations registered with the machine or to register or change destinations.
Program
Allows you to view a list of the programs registered with this machine or to register
or change programs.
Temporary OneTouch
Allows you to view a list of temporary programs registered with the machine or to
register or change them.
Subject
Allows you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails.
Text
Allows you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.4
11.4.6
11
User Mode Overview
Customize
This function enables you to specify the initial screen after logging in.
Item
Description
Option
Allows you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to
this machine.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-21
11
11.5
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
Administrator Mode Overview
When you are logged in to the administrator mode, you can configure the following functions.
d Reference
For details on the administrator mode, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
11.5.1
11-22
Maintenance
Item
Description
Meter Count
Allows you to check the meter count of this machine.
ROM Version
Allows you to check the ROM version.
Import/Export
Allows you to save (export) setting information of this machine as a file, or write (import) it from a file to this machine.
Status Notification Setting
Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has occurred in this machine. You can specify the destination and items to notify a registered user of an error.
Total Counter Notification Settings
Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and register the E-mail address of the destination.
Date/Time Setting
Specify the date and time displayed in this machine.
Timer Setting
Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine.
Network Error
Code Display
Setting
Specify whether to display the network error code.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.5
11.5.2
11
Administrator Mode Overview
Item
Description
Reset
Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations.
License Settings
Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, issues a request code.
Edit Font/Macro
Adds font or macro.
Job Log
You can create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this machine.
System Settings
Reference
To use the machine as a scanner from an application using TWAIN, install the "TWAIN" driver software
designed for that purpose. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together.
Item
Description
Machine Setting
Changes the registration information of this machine.
Register Support
Information
Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online
Assistance] in the user mode.
Network TWAIN
Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scanning).
User Box Setting
Configure the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or
specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable
saving or reading a document in or from the external memory.
Stamp Settings
Register a header or footer.
Blank Page Print
Settings
Allows you to configure whether to print the contents specified in "Stamp/Composition" on blank pages.
Skip Job Operation Settings
Specify whether to skip a job.
Flash Display Setting
Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display.
System Connection Setting
Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a
cellular phone.
Outline PDF Setting
Specify whether to outline text.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-23
11
11.5.3
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
Security
Item
Description
PKI Setting
Allows you to register a device certificate, or configure the SSL, protocol, or external
certificate setting.
Certificate Verification Settings
Specify the items to validate a certificate.
Address Reference Setting
When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group
name or access allowed level.
Restrict User Access
Specify the function to restrict user operations.
Copy Security
Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function.
Auto Logout
Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode.
Administrator
Password Setting
Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode.
"Administrator Password Setting" is not displayed when:
The SSL certificate is not installed
Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON"
[Mode using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Settings], even though a
device certificate is already registered
11-24
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.5
11.5.4
Administrator Mode Overview
11
User Authentication/Account Track
Item
Description
Authentication
Method
Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When
Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting.
User Authentication Setting
When user authentication is enabled, register users and their information.
Account Track
Settings
When account track is enabled, register or edit accounts.
External Server
Settings
When enabling external server authentication, register the external server.
Public User Box
Setting
Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes.
User/Account
Common Setting
Specify whether to print data in single color or two-color mode.
Scan to Home
Settings
Configure settings to send files to a Home folder.
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings
Configure settings to restrict manual transmission destinations.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-25
11
11.5.5
11-26
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
Network
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.5
Administrator Mode Overview
11
Item
Description
TCP/IP Setting
Allows you to configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network.
E-Mail Setting
Allows you to configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet
fax), and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication.
LDAP Setting
Allows you to configure the settings to register the LDAP server.
IPP Setting
Configure the IPP print setting.
FTP Setting
Allows you to configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server.
SNMP Setting
Allows you to configure SNMP settings.
SMB Setting
Allows you to configure the SMB client, WINS, or SMB print setting.
Web Service Settings
Allows you to configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services.
Bonjour Setting
Allows you to configure Bonjour settings.
NetWare Setting
Allows you to configure NetWare settings.
AppleTalk Setting
Allows you to configure AppleTalk settings.
Network Fax Setting
Allows you to configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings.
WebDAV Settings
Configure the WebDAV settings.
OpenAPI Setting
Allows you to configure the OpenAPI settings.
TCP Socket Setting
Allows you to configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this machine and the application software in your computer.
IEEE802.1X Authentication Setting
Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings.
LLTD Setting
Select whether to enable or disable LLTD.
SSDP Setting
Configure the SSDP settings.
Web Browser
Setting
Specify Web browser functions.
Bluetooth Setting
Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth.
• To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in advance.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-27
11
11.5.6
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
User Box
When you are logged in to the administrator mode, you can handle a User Box without entering the password
when opening it.
11-28
Item
Description
Open User Box
Allows you to open the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User
Box) and change the User Box setting.
• Document operations cannot be performed in the Administrator mode.
• Even if a password is set for a User Box, the User Box can be handled.
Create User Box
Allows you to create new User Boxes.
Open System
User Box
Allows you to open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User
Box) and handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting.
• The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional fax kit
FK-502 is installed.
Create System
User Box
Allows you to create a new Bulletin Board, Relay User, or Annotation User Box.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.5
11.5.7
Administrator Mode Overview
11
Print Settings
Item
Description
Basic Setting
Allows you to specify the default values of the printer.
PCL Setting
Allows you to specify the default values in the PCL mode.
PS Setting
Allows you to specify the default values in the PS mode.
TIFF Setting
Configure paper settings for TIFF mode.
XPS Settings
Allows you to configure the XPS print settings.
Interface Setting
Allows you to specify the timeout period of the interface.
Direct Print Settings
Allows you to configure the settings to enable direct printing using Web Connection.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-29
11
11.5.8
11-30
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
Store Address
Item
Description
Address Book
Allows you to view a list of the one-touch destinations registered with this machine
or to register or change destinations.
Group
Allows you to view a list of group destinations registered with the machine or to register or change destinations.
Program
Allows you to view a list of the programs registered with this machine or to register
or change programs.
Temporary OneTouch
Allows you to view a list of temporary programs registered with the machine or to
register or change them.
Subject
Allows you to register up to 10 subjects to be used when sending E-mails.
Text
Allows you to register up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails.
Application Registration
Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications
such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications
and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected application.
• "Application Registration" does not appear when the optional fax kit FK-502 is
installed.
Prefix/Suffix
Allows you to register Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when
E-mailing.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11.5
11.5.9
11
Administrator Mode Overview
Fax Settings
Item
Description
Header/Footer
Position
Configure the setting to print the sender or reception information.
Line Parameter
Setting
Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method.
TX/RX Settings
Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data.
Function Setting
Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax.
PBX Connection
Setting
Specify the outside line at PBX connection.
Report Settings
Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when
sending or receiving data.
Multi Line Settings
Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line.
• This item is displayed when a line is extended.
Network Fax Setting
Configure the setting to use network fax.
Header Information
Registers sender information and fax number when sending data.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
11-31
11
Administrator Mode Overview
11.5
11.5.10 Setting for each purpose
For an item with multiple settings required, configure them according to the instructions shown in the
window.
The available setting items are as follows.
Configure the settings for sending a scanned document
Configure the network print settings
Restrict users using this machine
Reference
As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left.
If setting is cancelled, you will return to the [Setting for each purpose] page after the items that were
configured before cancellation have been applied.
11-32
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12
Troubleshooting for fax and
scanning problems
12.1
12
12
Cannot send faxes
Troubleshooting for fax and scanning problems
This chapter provides solutions for some problems you encounter while using fax and scanning functions. If
you encounter a problem which is not listed in this chapter or difficult to solve, please contact your service
representative.
12.1
Cannot send faxes
When a fax cannot be sent, try to correct problems by referring to the table below. If the fax still cannot be
sent properly even after attempting to correct the problem, please contact your service representative.
d Reference
If you are unable to send a fax, the TX Result Report is output. For details, refer to page 8-14. (When printing
the TX Result Report is enabled)
For details on error messages, Refer to page 12-7.
For problems such as jamming of originals, paper jams, poor image quality or exhausted toner, refer to the
"User's Guide [Copy Operations]"
12.1.1
G3 Fax
Check points
Corrective Actions
Was the transmission
procedure carried out
correctly?
Check the transmission procedure and then resend the fax.
Is the recipient's fax
number correct? Were
the address book destination and program destination registered
correctly?
There may be an error in registering the fax number when the address book
destination and program destination are used.
Print the list of address book destinations to check that the numbers are registered correctly.
Correct if an error is found.
Is the telephone line setting correct?
Does the setting in [Dialing Method] in the Utility mode match the telephone
line being used? Check the setting and correct it if there is an error.
Is the telephone line correctly connected?
Is the telephone line disconnected?
Check the telephone cord for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.
Is there a problem with
the receiving machine?
Is the power of the receiving facsimile turned off, is it out of paper or is there
another problem?
Call the recipient to determine whether there is a problem.
Was a correct password
sent?
Check the recipient's password and then resend the fax using a correct
password.
Was the sender's fax
number correctly registered with "Check Dest.
& Send"?
Check that the fax number registered with the recipient is correct. Or, send
a fax with Check Dest. & Send set to "No".
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12-3
12
12.1.2
Cannot send faxes
12.1
Network fax or network scan sending
If you cannot send a fax while using the Internet Fax, IP Address Fax, E-mail, SMB, FTP, WebDAV or Web
Service functions, follow the steps below to identify the problem.
Check points
Corrective Actions
Does the size of E-mail to
be sent exceed the
SMTP server capacity?
If the size of E-mail exceeds the SMTP server capacity (if specified), an error
occurs and the E-mail cannot be sent. For details on the SMTP server capacity settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Was the transmission
procedure carried out
correctly?
Check the transmission procedure and then resend the fax. For details on the
transmission procedure, refer to page 5-3.
Are the network settings
and connection correct?
Check the network settings and connection. For details on the network settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Is the E-mail address of
the machine configured?
Check the E-mail address of the machine and configure it. For details on configuring the E-mail address, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Are cables connected
correctly?
Check that the network cable, modular cable, and any other relevant connectors are correctly connected.
Is the recipient's fax
number or address correct? Were the address
book destination and
program destination registered correctly?
There may be an error in registering the fax number when address book destination and program destination are used.
Print the list of address book destinations to check that the numbers are registered correctly.
Is there a problem with
the receiving machine?
Is the power of the receiving facsimile turned off, is it out of paper or is there
another problem? Call the recipient to determine whether there is a problem.
Reference
Even if the transmission result screen or the result area of an activity report indicates "----", due to a
problem in an Internet pathway, the E-Mail message may not be delivered to the recipient. "----"
displayed in the TX Result or Activity Report indicates that the fax has been successfully sent to the
server. If the machine receives a message disposition notification (MDN), [OK] appears in the
transmission result screen or the result column of an activity report. Use G3 Fax to receive important
contents.
12-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12.2
12.2
12
Cannot receive faxes
Cannot receive faxes
When a fax cannot be received, try to correct problems by referring to the table below. If a fax reception error
persists, please contact your service representative.
d Reference
If you are unable to send a fax, the TX Result Report is output. For details, refer to page 8-14. (When printing
the TX Result Report is enabled)
For details on error messages, Refer to page 12-7.
For problems such as jamming of originals, paper jams, poor image quality or exhausted toner, refer to the
"User's Guide [Copy Operations]"
12.2.1
G3 Fax
Description of
problem
Check points
Corrective Actions
Cannot receive
faxes
Is paper in the
machine?
If the add paper icon is lit, the machine is out of paper and received documents are stored in memory. Add paper.
For the procedure for adding paper, refer to the "User's Guide
[Copy Operations]".
Is paper jammed
in the machine?
In case of a paper jam, received documents are stored in
memory.
Remove the jammed paper.
For the procedure for correcting paper jams, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Is the machine
out of toner?
No fax can be received if the toner is exhausted.
Replace the toner cartridge.
For the procedure for replacing the toner cartridges, refer to
the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Is the Receive
Mode set to Manual RX?
If [Receive Mode] in the Utility menu is set to [Manual RX], it is
necessary to perform the reception procedure manually. Perform the manual reception procedure by referring to page 6-4.
Is the telephone
line correctly connected?
Is the telephone cord unplugged? Check the telephone cord
for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.
Is [Closed Network RX] enabled?
If [Closed Network RX] is enabled, the machine accepts faxes
sent from specific recipients. For details, contact your administrator.
Has a wrong SUB
been sent in Fcode from the
sender side?
If a wrong sub-address is received with the Confidential or Relay User Box set, a communication error may occur, causing
failed reception. Check the sender side to see if the sub-address is set.
Is PC-Fax RX enabled?
Check the User Box used by the PC-Fax RX function to save
data.
Is TSI Distribution
enabled?
Check the User Box used by the TSI Distribution function to
save data.
Is Memory RX enabled?
If Memory RX is enabled, print the document received by following the procedure described below.
• Press the [User Box] key.
• Press [System User Box].
• Press [Memory RX User Box], and then press [Use/File].
• If a password has been configured, enter it and then click
[OK].
• Select the document you want to print and then press
[Print].
Or set [Memory RX Setting] to [No].
No printout produced
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12-5
12
12.2.2
Cannot receive faxes
Network Fax
Description of
problem
Check points
Corrective Actions
Cannot receive
faxes
Is paper in the
machine?
If the add paper icon is lit, the machine is out of paper and received documents are stored in memory. Add paper.
For the procedure for adding paper, refer to the "User's Guide
[Copy Operations]".
Is paper jammed
in the machine?
In case of a paper jam, received documents are stored in
memory. Remove the jammed paper.
For the procedure for correcting paper jams, refer to the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Is the machine
out of toner?
No fax can be received if the toner is exhausted. Replace the
toner cartridge.
For the procedure for replacing the toner cartridges, refer to
the "User's Guide [Copy Operations]".
Is the network cable correctly connected?
Check the network cable for connection and, if disconnected,
connect it securely.
Is the memory full
or does the hard
disk lack sufficient available
space?
Check the remaining amount of memory or hard disk space. If
there is insufficient memory or hard disk space, the machine
will fail to receive faxes or, if it receives faxes, will fail to print
them.
Is Memory RX enabled?
If Memory RX is enabled, print the document received by following the procedure described below.
• Press the [User Box] key.
• Press [System User Box].
• Press [Memory RX User Box], and then press [Use/File].
• If a password has been configured, enter it and then press
[OK].
• Select the document you want to print and then press
[Print].
Optionally, you can change the setting to disable Memory RX.
For details, refer to page 10-24.
No printout produced
12-6
12.2
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12.3
12.3
12
Error messages displayed
Error messages displayed
If the machine encounters a problem, an error dialog will appear and display one of the following error
messages. Take corrective actions by referring to the table below.
If a communication error persists, please contact your service representative.
12.3.1
12.3.2
G3 Fax
Error Message
Corrective Actions
Failed to complete the
job due to an error while
dialing.
Redial was attempted the number of times specified, however, transmission
failed because the recipient was busy or due to other reasons.
Check the recipient's state to resend the fax.
Unable to check sender
The machine failed to verify the recipient with Check Dest. & Send set to[ON].
Check that the receiver's fax number is registered correctly.
The job has been deleted
due to insufficient memory.
During scanning of original, the memory became full.
Press [Start] to send scanned originals. Press [Stop] to stop faxing.
Job Failed
Check the line connection.
The telephone cord may have become unplugged.
Check the telephone cord for connection and, if unplugged, plug it securely.
Cannot connect to the
network
Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make
sure that "Network Settings" in Administrator Settings is correctly configured.
The destination cannot
be selected because the
number of destinations
has exceeded the max.
number of broadcasting
possible
The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a
broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or
send the transmission in multiple batches.
Document could not be
saved in the User Box
due to insufficient HDD
capacity. Check log.
The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data
again.
The number of registered
User Boxes has reached
the maximum allowed
The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum
number possible. Delete unnecessary User Boxes, and then try registering
new boxes again.
This user box has
reached its maximum
number of pages allowed.
The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the
maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try
saving the document again.
The maximum number of
jobs has been queued.
Wait until a queued job is
completed.
The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum
number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job.
If the HDD Ready indicator indicates an HDD malfunction
Contact your service representative.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12-7
12
12.3.3
Error messages displayed
12.3
Network Fax Error Code
If the machine encounters a problem while sending or receiving a network fax, an error dialog will appear and
error codes will be displayed in Nxx format. Take corrective actions by referring to the table below.
Transmission system error code
Code
Type
Description
Redial ON
or OFF
Corrective Actions
N10
Connection error
Connection with
server error
OFF
•
•
•
N11
Connection error
Connection refused
OFF
Reception refused. Check the state of the
recipient.
N12
Connection error
Line disconnected
ON
Verify that the cables and cords are securely connected and that there is no network
failure.
N13
Connection error
No network response
OFF
•
•
•
Check the state of the recipient.
Check the network settings for the machine.
Ask the network administrator to ensure
that the network is running successfully.
N14
Connection error
Mail distribution error
OFF
Check the recipient's state and then resend
the fax.
N15
Recipient
resetting
Recipient
connection
reset
ON
Check the recipient's state and then resend
the fax.
N16
Recipient
busy
Recipient
busy
ON
Check the recipient's state and then resend
the fax.
N17
LAN connection
Connection timeout
OFF
Check the recipient's state and then resend
the fax.
N18
Network error
Network error
OFF
•
•
•
12-8
Check the state of the recipient.
Check the network settings for the machine.
Ask the network administrator to ensure
that the network is running successfully.
Check that the network fax settings are
correct.
Verify that the cables and cords are securely connected and that there is no
network failure.
Turn the main power off and back on
and then resend the fax.
N20
Memory error
Memory error
OFF
Memory is full.
• Check that there are no other jobs being
processed.
• Reduce the number of pages to be sent
or reduce the scanning resolution to resend the fax.
N21
HDD error
HDD error
OFF
The hard disk is full.
• Delete unnecessary files.
• Reduce the number of pages to be sent
or reduce the scanning resolution to resend the fax.
N22
Conversion
error
Conversion
error
OFF
Turn the main power off and back on and
then resend the fax.
N25
Memory
overflow
Memory
over
OFF
Memory is full.
• Check that there are no other jobs being
processed.
• Reduce the number of pages to be sent
or reduce the scanning resolution to resend the fax.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12.3
12
Error messages displayed
Reception system error code
Code
Type
Description
Corrective Actions
N50
SMTP reception
SMTP reception error
If SMTP reception does not start 60 minutes later after an
incoming call was connected, this error occurs.
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
N51
Decoding
Original too
long error
Ask the sender to shorten the length of original to be sent
before resending the fax.
N52
Decoding
Received
page too
long error
Ask the sender to reduce the number of pages to be sent
before resending the fax.
N53
Decoding
File error
Ask the sender to resend the fax in a correct format shown
below.
Internet fax: TIFF
IP Address Fax: PDF or TIFF
N54
Decoding
Decode error
Fax received contains data in an invalid format. Ask the
sender to resend the fax in a correct format.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
12-9
12
12.4
If "Contact your service representative" is displayed (Service Call)
12.4
If "Contact your service representative" is displayed (Service Call)
If there is a problem that cannot be remedied by the customer, "Contact your service representative" appears
on the screen. (Service Call screen)
Normally, the phone number and fax number for your service representative appear in the center of the
Service Call screen.
The following is the procedure for notifying your service representative of a problem.
7 CAUTION
To prevent the risk of serious accident, perform the following when the service call screen is displayed and
the facsimile is no longer operable.
Write down the problem code of the message.
Turn off the [Sub power switch] and [Main power switch].
Remove the power cord from the outlet.
Contact your service representative and inform them of the problem code.
12-10
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13
Appendix
13
13.1
Product specifications
13
Appendix
13.1
Product specifications
13.1.1
Scanner functions
13.1.2
Item
Specifications
Scan speed
78 sheets/minute (for 8-1/2 e 11 (A4))
Scannable range
Same as the copier (Max. 11 e 17 (A3))
Functions
E-Mail
FTP
PC (SMB)
User Box
WebDAV
Web Service
Scanner resolution
200/300/400/600dpi
Scannable paper size
11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v,
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v
A3 w to A5 w/v, A6 w, B4 w to B6 w
Postcard (100 mm e 148 mm) w/v
Special functions
Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Long Original, Binding Position, Frame
Erase, Book Copy, Original Direction, Stamp/Composition
Fax function
Item
Specifications
Image memory capacity
2,048 MB (standard)
Number of stored pages
10,000 pages (when an approx. 700-character original with the 8-1/2 e 11
(A4) size is stored with Fine resolution)
Applicable lines
Subscribed telephone lines (including facsimile communication networks)
PBX lines
Scanning line density
Ultra Fine:
600 dpi e 600 dpi
Super Fine:
16 dot/mm e 15.4 line/mm, 400 dpi e 400 dpi
Fine:
8 dot/mm e 7.7 line/mm, 200 dpi e 200 dpi
Normal:
8 dot/mm e 3.85 line/mm
Faxes are transmitted at any of the above scanning line densities according
to the capabilities of a recipient's machine.
Baud rate (G3)
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/
28800/31200/33600 bps
Maximum scanning size
Original glass: 16-9/16 e 11-11/16 inches (420 e 297 mm) (11 e 17 (A3) size)
ADF: 11-11/16 e 39-3/8 inches (297 mm e 1000 mm)
Maximum recording size
16-9/16 e 11-11/16 inches (420 e 297 mm) (11 e 17 (A3) size)
You cannot receive originals in excess of 39-3/8 inches (1000 mm) in size.
When originals longer than the paper size in trays have been received, printing is made based on the settings of the Page Separation setting.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-3
13
Tips
13.2
Tips
13.2.1
Number of pages saved in memory
13.2
This machine contains the 250 GB hard disk in the standard.
In the hard disk, it is possible to store about 10,000 our standard originals in an A4 size sheet with 700 words
that are saved and received in each mode (Copy, Printer, Scan, User Box and Fax) (with the resolution set to
"Fine").
Reference
Memory overflow may occur when the original document is being read. In this case, Allows you to either
transmit the part of the original that has been read, or redo the procedure from the beginning.
13.2.2
Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer (Web service)
You can tell the machine to scan originals through a computer and receive scanned data.
The following is an example of procedure for scanning originals via Windows Photo Gallery.
Reference
For the settings you must configure in advance, refer to page 4-7.
You can also tell the machine to scan originals to save them. For the detailed procedure, refer to
page 5-31.
Telling the machine to make a scan through a computer
1
Start a scanner enabled application.
2
On the [File] menu, click [Import from Camera or Scanner].
3
From the list of [Scanners and Cameras], select this machine and then click [Import].
The [New Scan] dialog box appears.
4
Load the original on the machine.
5
Configure scan settings and then click [Scan].
6
In the [Tag these images] list, enter the file name and then click [Import].
The original is scanned and the scanned data is added to the list of images.
13-4
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13.3
13.3
13
Scanner Glossary
Scanner Glossary
Term
Description
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/
1000BASE-T
A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist
of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10
Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.
Active Directory
A network service provided by Microsoft. Active Directory can centrally manage
all types of information including servers, clients, printers and other hardware resources, as well as properties and access permissions of users on the network.
Adobe® Flash®
Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations
and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard
or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web
browser with dedicated plug-in software.
Anonymous FTP
While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this
type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering
anonymous as the account name.
APOP
The acronym for Authenticated Post Office Protocol. While usual POP does not
encrypt the password used for receiving an E-mail, APOP encrypts the password. This authentication method helps enhance the E-mail security.
AppleTalk
The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for computer networking.
Auto IP
A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address
via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0".
bit
The abbreviation of Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity)
handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data.
BMP
The abbreviation for Bitmap. It is a file format used to save image data. (The file
extension is ".bmp"). Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the
color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP
is basically used to save images without compression.
Bonjour
A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting devices connected to
the network and configuring the devices. Previously called "Rendezvous", and
has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4.
Byte
A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or
printer. A byte consists of eight bits.
Client
A computer using services provided by servers via the network.
Compact PDF
A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used
when digitalizing color documents.
Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and
image regions and applying the resolution and compression method optimized
for each region.
The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents.
Contrast
The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image
(light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation.
CSV
The acronym for Comma Separated Values, which is one of the formats used for
saving database or spreadsheet data as a text file. (The file extension is ".csv".)
Data can be shared among different applications by being separated by commas
(as the delimiter).
Default
An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the
function is activated.
Default Gateway
A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs.
Density
The amount of density of an image.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-5
13
13-6
Scanner Glossary
13.3
Term
Description
DHCP
The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a
server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP
clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other
troubles.
DNS
The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address
corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a
user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses.
DNS Host Name
The name of a device on the network.
DPI (dpi)
The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this
value, the higher the resolution.
Driver
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device.
Dynamic authentication (LDAP setting)
An authentication method option used when connecting to a LDAP server from
a multifunctional product. Select this option if you want an user to enter the login
name and password each time the user logs on the LDAP server to refer to destination information.
Ethernet
LAN transmission line standard
File extension
Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg".
FTP
The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. which is used to transfer files via the Internet, intranet or other TCP/IP network.
Gateway
Hardware and software used as the point where a network is connected to a network. A gateway also changes data formats, addresses, and protocols according to the connected network.
Gradation
The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce
smoother transition of the shading.
Gray Scale
A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information
shifting from black to white.
GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/Digest MD5
Authentication methods used for logging in to the LDAP server. The different authentication method, GSS-SPENEGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5 is used for a LDAP
server depending on the type of the server being used or server settings.
Halftone
A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black
and white dots
Hard disk
A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after
the power is turned off.
HTTP
The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol, which is used to transmit data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange
files such as images, sounds, and moving pictures that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information.
ICM
The acronym for Image Color Management, a color management system used
for Windows. ICM adjusts the difference of a color caused by different I/O devices, such as monitors, scanners and printers, and reproduce the color mostly
common to any those devices.
IMAP
The acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. The protocol for retrieving
E-mail messages with the function for managing mailboxes on the server. Currently, IMAP4 (the fourth version of IMAP) is most often used.
Install
To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a computer
IP Address
An address or a code used to identify individual network devices on the Internet.
A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as 192.168.1.10.
The IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the
Internet.
IPP
The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol, which is used to send or receive print
data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also
send data to be printed to printers in remote areas via the Internet.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13.3
13
Scanner Glossary
Term
Description
IPsec
The name of a security technology used for the TCP/IP network. IPsec allows
service with enhanced security by determining the protocol used for the encryption of transmit packets and for authentication.
IPv6
The acronym for Internet Protocol version 6. With the number of devices on the
Internet increasing, the IPv6 protocol has been arranged to replace the current
IPv4 protocol. 128-bit IP addressing system and expanded security features.
IPX
One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI
reference model.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems that runs on most
computers regardless of the installed hardware and operating system. However,
in order to run Java applications, an operating environment called Java Virtual
Machine (Java VM) is required.
Kerberos
A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used for Active
Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network
to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated.
LAN
The acronym for Local Area Network, a network constructed by connecting
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings.
LDAP
The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.
LPD
The acronym for Line Printer Daemon, a platform-independent printer protocol
running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed for BSD
UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used among general computers.
LPR/LPD
The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon, a printing method via
the network, used for Windows NT or UNIX based systems. LPR/LPD uses
TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or Unix to a printer on the network.
MAC Address
MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. MAC address is an ID number
unique to each Ethernet card, enabling the cards to send and receive data to and
from each other. A Mac address consists of 48-bit numbers. The first 24 bits are
controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture,
whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique
number to each card.
Memory
A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain
data even when the power is turned off, while others not.
MH
The acronym for Modified Huffman, a data compression encoding method used
for fax transmissions. Text-based originals are compressed to approximately
1/10 the original size.
MIB
The acronym for Management Information Base, which defines the format of
management information for network devices that are collected using SNMP in
TCP/IP communication. Two types of MIB are provided, that is, the private MIB
specific to each manufacturer and the standardized MIB.
MMR
The acronym for Modified Modified Read, a data compression encoding method
used for fax transmissions. Text-based originals are compressed to approximately 1/20 the original size.
NetBEUI
The acronym for NetBIOS Extended User Interface, a network protocol developed by IBM. NetBEUI enables you to construct a small-scale network simply by
configuring computer names.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, using NetWare IPX/SPX as the
communication protocol.
NTLM
The acronym for NT LAN Manager, a user authentication method used for Windows NT or later. NTLM encodes password using MD4 or MD5 encoding method.
NTP
The acronym for Network Time Protocol, a protocol used to adjust the computer's internal clock precisely via the network. In a hierarchical method, the time
is adjusted with the server at the highest level using GPS to acquire the correct
time, which is then referenced by each lower level host.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-7
13
13-8
Scanner Glossary
13.3
Term
Description
OCR
The acronym for Optical Character Reader, a device or software that converts
handwritten or printed characters to text data by optically scanning them and
comparing them with previously stored patterns for identification.
OS
The acronym for Operating System, a base software used to control the system
of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or Unix is an OS.
PASV
The acronym for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within
a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission.
PDF
The acronym for Portable Document Format, an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is a PostScript based format, and can be
viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software.
Peer-to-peer
A type of network allowing connected devices to communicate each other without using a dedicated server.
Pixel
•
•
POP
The acronym for Post Office Protocol. A protocol for retrieving E-mail messages
from a mail server. Currently, POP3 (the third version of POP) is most often used.
POP Before SMTP
A user authentication method used when sending E-mail messages. It receives
E-mail messages in the first, then authenticates the user using the POP server.
The IP address, passed through the user authentication by the POS server, is
then permitted to use the SMTP server. This method prevents third parties without permission to use the mail server from sending messages.
Port Number
A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple
processes.
Preview
A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or
scanning.
Printer driver
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer.
Property
Attribute information When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. Also by using a file property, you can check the attribute information about the file.
Protocol
A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals.
Proxy Server
A server installed for the connection with the Internet. A proxy server acts as a
proxy of client computers to contact the Internet to ensure security effectively for
the total organization.
RAW port number
A TCP port number used when the RAW protocol is selected for Windows or other TCP printing. The RAW port number is usually set to 9100.
realm (IPP setting)
An area used for allowing security functions. The area is used to organize user
names, passwords and other authentication information, and define the security
policy in the area.
Referral setting
(LDAP setting)
If there is no relevant destination data found on an LDAP server, the LDAP server
itself instructs which LDAP server to be searched for the next. The referral setting
configures whether the multifunctional product is responsible for searching the
next LDAP server.
Resolution
Resolution indicates how much details of an object can be reproduced precisely
on an image or a print matter.
S/MIME
The acronym for Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions.
It is a protocol used to add encryption, digital signature, and other features to
MIME (E-mail operations).
Public key method is used for encryption, using a different key for encryption and
decryption.
Samba
UNIX server software using SMB (Server Message Block) so that UNIX system
resources can be used from Windows environments.
Scanning
The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors
step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning
direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction.
The smallest constitutional unit of an image.
Pixel indicates an image pixel, the smallest constitutional unit of an image.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13.3
13
Scanner Glossary
Term
Description
Screen frequency
The density of dots used to create the image.
Single-page TIFF
A TIFF file that contains only a single page.
SLP
An acronym for Service Location Protocol. Services on a TCP/IP network and clients are automatically searched for.
SMB
The acronym for Server Message Block, a protocol allowing the share of files and
printers mainly over the Windows network.
SMTP
The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, a protocol used to transmit/transfer E-mails.
SNMP
The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is a management protocol in the TCP/IP network environments.
SSL/TLS
The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding
method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser.
Subnet Mask
A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks).
TCP/IP is used to identify how many higher-order bits of the IP address are used
for the network address.
TCP Socket
TCP Socket indicates an API used for the TCP/IP network. This socket is used
to open a transmission route for input/output usual files.
TCP/IP
The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto
standard protocol widely used for the Internet. The IP address is used to identify
each network device.
Thumbnail
A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image (image displayed when the file is opened).
TIFF
The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, one of the file formats used for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data
type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data.
TWAIN
An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners
and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a
TWAIN compatible device, a corresponding TWAIN driver is required.
Uninstallation
To delete software installed on a computer
USB
The acronym for Universal Serial Bus, a general-purpose interface defined for
connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer.
Web browser
Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers are Internet Explorer
and Netscape Navigator.
WINS
The acronym for Windows Internet Naming Service, a service available in Windows environments, of calling the name server responsible for converting between a computer name and an IP address.
Zone
A name used for an AppleTalk network. Zone is used to group multiple devices
on the AppleTalk network.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-9
13
13.4
Internet Fax Glossary
13.4
Internet Fax Glossary
This section describes the general terms used in the Internet fax communications.
13-10
Term
Description
DSN
The acronym for Delivery Status Notifications, a delivery status notification message being returned from a receiver to a sender when the E-mail is delivered to
the receiver's mail server.
Internet Fax
A transmission method by which the scanned original data is transmitted among
Internet fax machines and computers as TIFF format E-mail attachments via the
intranet (in-house network) and the Internet.
MDN
The acronym for Message Disposition Notifications, a message sent to confirm
that the mail has been unsealed, a response to a sender when the sender requests for doing so.
POP3
The acronym for Post Office Protocol - Version 3, a commonly used transmission
protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and reception of E-mail.
POP3 has functions including mail box authentication, E-mail download, list information check, and E-mail deletion.
SMTP
The acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, a commonly used transmission
protocol (transmission convention) for the transmission and reception of E-mail.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13.5
13.5
13
Fax Glossary
Fax Glossary
This section describes the general terms used in the fax communications.
Explanations may be given of the terms of functions that are not included in this machine.
Term
Description
Address Book
A function of registering frequently used fax numbers of recipients. When registering abbreviated addresses, you should also register the destination name and
the search string, so that you can specify the destination using the search string
to select.
Background Removal
A function to adjust the shading of background color before sending the document.
Batch transmission
A function to send documents as one document at a specified time if the documents have the same transmission conditions such as destination, transmission
time, memory transmission or resolution, and are stored in the same memory.
Baudrate
Baudrate indicates, for the fax, the transmission rate of a modem.
This machine can communicate at a high transmission rate of 33,600bps. When
selecting overseas communication mode, the machine communicates at
7200bps or 4800bps, a rate suitable for noise-resistance.
Binding position
A function to specify the binding position of a double-sided document when it is
sent using ADF. Two types of binding positions are available for a double-sided
document: One is the top and bottom binding with the binding position at the top
or bottom of the document. The other is left and right binding with the binding
position at the left or right of the document. Note that the second side of the document has a different top or bottom relation.
Book Copy
A function of, when sending a fax of a book or catalog, separating the front cover, back cover, right pages, and left pages into individual pages.
bps
The acronym for bit per second, a unit of data transmission, indicating the
amount of data transmitted per second.
Broadcast
A transmission of a single document to many recipients in one operation.
Bulletin board
A function of posting documents to be viewed, or stores the documents to be
transmitted via polling.
Check Dest. & Send
A function to send a fax after comparing the specified fax number with the fax
number information of the recipient (CSI). Only when those numbers match, the
function sends the fax. If the numbers are not matched, a transmission error occurs. Therefore, this prevents misdirected transmissions. The sender's fax
number must be correctly registered with recipient's machine.
Closed Network RX
A function to accept only transmissions from recipient machines with a matching
password.
Confidential communication
A function to transmit a document to specific persons you want them to read it.
Documents sent via confidential communication are not printed when received,
and are saved in a confidential box of the recipient's fax machine. The document
can be printed by some specific operation such as entering the access code for
the confidential box.
Default value
A setting value configured for the machine prior to shipment from the factory.
Some default values can be changed by using the settings menu. It is convenient
to set a frequently used value to the default value according to your application.
Dialing Method
Three types are provided for Dialing methods: PB (push-button dialing), 10PPS
(pulse dialing/ 10 pps), and 20PPS (pulse dialing/ 20 pps).
ECM
(Error Correction Mode)
ECM is the error resending method used for G3 communication. ECM checks
whether the data is correctly sent to the destination, and should it be not the
case, ECM resends the same data while maintains the serial communication. If
a receiver also provides the ECM mode, this machine uses the ECM-based communication with the receiver unless the ECM mode is disabled.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-11
13
13-12
Fax Glossary
13.5
Term
Description
F-Code
A communication procedure related to the usage of subaddress of T.30* standardized by CIAJ (Communications and Information Network Association of Japan). F code is provided by Japanese Communications Industrial Corporation.
Various kinds of capabilities are available for the communication among fax machines with the F code function irrespective of difference of the fax machine
brand. This machine uses F code for the bulletin boards, relay request, confidential communication, and password transmission. (* a communication standard)
Frame Erase
A function of erasing dark shadow around the document before transmitting it
via fax, when scanning a booklet form document or a document with ADF kept
open.
G3
A fax communication mode standardized by the ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union). G3 and G4 are provided for the communication modes. Today, G3 is more widely used than G4.
Group
The grouping of multiple abbreviation numbers. It is convenient to use the group
when a volume of sequential broadcast transmissions or sequential pollings are
distributed to the same destination addresses.
In-memory proxy reception
A function of saving received documents automatically to memory when the machine is unable to print the documents for some reason such as running out of
paper. When a proper action is taken such as refilling of paper, the temporarily
saved document is printed out.
LDAP
The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network.
Long Original
A function to send original pages longer than A3 size (16-1/2 inches (420 mm)).
Long originals can be sent by selecting this function.
Main scanning direction
The horizontal direction for scanning documents.
Manual transmission
An operation to send a fax while checking the status of the receiver.
Memory
A location where information is stored temporarily. It is used to instruct the machine to send faxes or to save temporarily stored documents.
Memory overflow
A condition where the fax memory becomes full while scanned documents or
temporarily stored documents are saved.
Memory RX
A function of storing received documents in memory, and printing them if required.
Memory TX
A method to start a fax transmission after scanning documents and storing them
in memory. If memory transmission is used, the total number of pages are automatically printed in the page number of the transmission source information and
an image of the first page of the sent document is printed in the transmission report. However, the memory may become full if the document contains many
pages, or a large volume of information because of the fine and minute image.
Mixed Original
A function of setting different sizes of documents, detecting the size of each document, and send them accordingly.
Number of Originals
A function used for quick memory transmission with information of the total
number of pages. This allows the recipient to check whether the all pages were
received or not (In case of memory transmission, the total no. of pages are automatically added).
Overseas communication
This is a function to communicate with an overseas recipient. If an overseas
communication mode is set, the fax is sent with a lower speed. Specifying an
overseas transmission mode ensures the fax transmission when faxing to the location where transmission conditions are poor, even within the country.
Password TX
The function of sending a fax with a password. If the recipient's fax machine is
set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the
same password as used for the closed network reception.
Pause
A temporary break in dialing. In this machine, each pause creates a one second
break during dialing.
PB
A push telephone line.
PC-FAX
A function to send a fax directly from a computer without using paper.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13.5
13
Fax Glossary
Term
Description
Polling
A function available on the receiver's side to request a sender to send documents set or stored in the sender's machine or memory.
Program
A function of registering frequently used destination fax numbers, or stereotyped
transmission operation procedures. By simply pressing the [Mode Memory] key,
you can specify the destination, or configure a function automatically to start
communication.
Quick Memory TX
A method to start sending fax immediately after scanning a page of the document. This method allows even a document with many pages to be sent without
overflowing memory.
Receiving
A fax machine status where it receives a call.
Redial
A function of dialing a fax number again, when recipient's line is busy, after waiting for a specified length of time. Both manual redial and automatic redial functions are available to select.
Reference Allowed
Level
A feature for specifying settings so that only certain people are able to view certain destination information for the security of the information. When synchronized with user authentication, only information with an access permission level
matching that specified for the user can be viewed.
Relay broadcast
A function to broadcast fax messages via other fax machine (called a relay distribution station). When you have multiple broadcast destinations in remote
place, you may configure one of the destinations as a relay station to transfer the
broadcast via the relay station, so that you can reduce the total communication
rate.
Relay distribution
station
A fax machine that sends faxes to relaying destinations upon request for relay
issued from a relay instruction station.
Relay instruction station
A fax machine sending a relay broadcast request.
Resolution
The granularity for scanning documents. The larger the value of resolution, the
finer the image quality is, consequently, it takes longer to transmit (transmission
time). Select the level of resolution according to your requirements.
Retransmission
A function of selecting and resending the document that was previously failed to
send and stored in the memory. The document can be resent either to the same
destination or to the other destination.
Scan
The operation of scanning a document optically, and converting the document
into image data.
Scan Size
A function to specify the scanning size of a document to transmit it. If the width
of the paper in the recipient's fax machine is smaller than that of the transmitted
document, the document is usually reduced for printing. If you do not want to
reduce the document size, specify the same document size as that of the paper
in the recipient's fax machine, so that you can send the document with its original size.
Sender Fax No
An identification code used for the mutual recognition for fax transmission. Usually the fax number is registered for the fax ID.
Sender Name
The name of a sender. On the receiver's side, the name is printed as a part of the
sender's information at the edge of the transmitted document.
Sending
Sending indicates making a call. For fax, sending indicates sending documents
or dialing for pollings.
Sharpness
A function to enhance the edge of characters before sending the document.
Sub-scanning direction
The vertical direction for scanning documents.
Super G3 (SG3)
A G3 communication mode complying with ITU-T V.34. Compared with usual G3
communication, it allows the higher rate transmission (up to 33,600bps).
Temporary forward
transmission
A function of manually forwarding the received document that is standby for output, by using the setting check button on the control panel. The function must
be set while the fax/scan screen is displayed, or the operation is halted because
of paper misfeed or running out of paper.
Timer TX
A function of transmitting a fax at the specified time. It is used to save cost by
transmitting faxes late evening or early morning when discount telephone service is available.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
13-13
13
13-14
Fax Glossary
13.5
Term
Description
Transmission reservation
A function of programming the next transmission during transmission or printing.
Transmission source
record
The transmission time, name, telephone number, page number, and other information on the sender's side printed at the edge of the document on the receiver's side.
Transmission time
The time needed to send a fax. The higher the resolution or larger the paper, the
longer the transmission takes.
TSI
The acronym for Transmitting Subscriber Identification, which is the ID of a fax
transmission terminal.
V34
A communication mode used for super G3 fax transmission. Super G3 mode
transmission may not be activated because of a telephone line status where the
receiver's or sender's machine is connected to a telephone line via a private
branch exchange switchboard. If this occurs, the G3 mode should be disabled
by turning V34 off.
Z folded Original
This function first determines the document size that cannot be detected correctly because of folds, then scans and sends the document after the verification. This function is available only when a document is scanned by ADF.
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
14
Index
14.1
14
Index by item
14
Index
14.1
Index by item
A
Activity Report 8-12
Address Book 4-5, 5-21
E-Mail 9-7
Fax 9-10
FTP 9-14
Internet Fax 9-19
IP Address Fax 9-18
PC (SMB) 9-12
User Box 9-9
WebDAV 9-16
Address Search (LDAP)
Advanced Search 5-33
Search 5-33
Address Type 5-22
Administrator Mode 11-22
Administrator Mode Settings 10-3
Administrator Settings 10-9, 10-14
Advanced preview 5-11
An address Polling Rx Reserved Report 8-20
Annotation 5-49
Application 5-46, 5-47, 5-49, 5-52, 5-53
Authentication 2-5
Auto redialing 5-69
Auto RX (Dedicated for fax line) 6-3
B
Background Removal 5-45
Binding Position 5-48, 5-56
Black Compression Level 10-40
Body 5-60
Book Copy 5-47
Book Erase 5-47, 5-48
Brightness 3-4
Broadcast Report 8-14
Broadcast Reserved Report 8-19
Bulletin 7-9
Bulletin TX Report 8-21
C
Cannot receive faxes 12-5
Cannot send faxes 12-3
Center Erase 5-48
Check Dest. & Sand 5-59
Check E-Mail Settings 3-19
Check Job - Check Job Settings 3-18
Closed Network RX 10-25
Color 5-43
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression
Method 10-40
Communication Method Settings 5-62
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Communication Settings 3-19, 5-58
Confidential RX 7-5
Confidential RX Report 8-20
Connection to network 4-3
Contact your service representative 12-10
Control panel 3-3
Copy Guard 10-12
Create User Box
Bulletin Board User Box 9-24
Confidential User Box 9-24
Relay User Box 9-24
Customize 11-21
D
Date/Time 5-49
Density 5-42
Despeckle 5-57
Destination Machine Type 5-27
Destination Settings 3-18
Detail 5-31
Detail Search 5-24, 5-61
Detailed Settings 5-29, 5-30
Digital Signature 5-67
Direct Input 5-61
Fax 5-25
Direct Print 11-19
Document Name 5-54, 5-59
DSN Message 10-39
E
ECM OFF 5-58
E-mail address
This machine 4-4
E-Mail Encryption 5-67
E-Mail Settings 5-59
E-Mail Subject/Text List 8-24
E-Mail transmission 2-7
Encryption 5-40
Enter New Address
E-mail 5-25
FTP 5-29
Internet Fax 5-26
IP Address Fax 5-27
PC (SMB) 5-28
User Box 5-26
Web Service 5-31
WebDAV 5-30
Enter Power Save Mode 10-14
Environment and device requirements 4-3
Error Message 12-7
Extension line 7-9
14-3
14
Index by item
F
Fax Active Screen 9-27
Fax Header Settings 5-68
Fax Retransmit 5-70
Fax Settings 11-31
F-Code TX 5-67
File Path 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
File Type 5-38
Footer Position 6-14
Forward 7-9
Forward TX Setting 10-26
Frame Erase 5-46, 5-47
From 5-60
FTP transmission 2-7
Function Settings 10-23, 10-33
G
G3 fax 2-10
Group 4-5, 5-22
M
Maintenance 11-22
Manual Destination Input 10-12
Manual redialing 5-69
Manual RX (Dedicated telephone line) 6-4
Manual transmission 5-35
MDN Message 10-39
Memory RX 7-3
Memory RX Setting 10-24
Menu tree 5-15, 9-3, 10-5
Mixed Original 5-55
Modular cable 4-4
Multi Line Settings 10-32, 10-33
N
Header Information 10-16
Header/Footer 5-51
Header/Footer Position 10-17
Header/Footer Settings 10-11
Host Name 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
How to access
Web Connection 11-3
I
O
Icon 3-7
Image Adjustment 5-45, 5-46
Incomplete TX Hold 10-27
Index 5-23
Information 11-16
In-memory proxy reception 6-7
Internet Fax 2-11
Internet Fax Advanced Settings 10-41
Internet Fax RX Error Report 8-23
Internet Fax Self RX Ability 10-41
IP Address 5-27
IP Address Fax 2-11
Off-Hook 5-35
One-Touch/User Box Registration 9-7
Operating environment
Web Connection 11-3
Original Direction 5-55
Original Settings 3-19, 5-55
Original Type 5-36
Overseas TX 5-58
J
Job 11-17
Job History 5-32
Job List 3-9
Job Settings List 8-14, 10-31
L
Left panel 3-9
Limiting Access to Destinations Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations 9-24
Line Parameter Setting 10-18, 10-32
Line Settings 5-58
Lists 8-4
14-4
Logging in 11-5
Logging out 11-5
Long Original 5-55
Network 11-26
Network Fax Settings 10-40
Network settings 4-4
Next Destination 5-26, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
Notes on use
Fax functions (G3) 2-3
Internet Fax 2-4
IP Address Fax 2-4
Network Fax 2-4
Number of pages saved in memory 13-4
H
14.1
P
Page Configuration
Web Connection 11-14
Page Number 5-50
Password 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
Password Copy 10-12
Password TX 5-64
PBX Connection Setting 10-29
PC-Fax RX 7-3
PC-Fax RX Settings 10-27
PC-Fax TX Error Report 8-22
Polling 2-10
Polling RX 7-8
Polling RX - Bulletin 5-63
Polling RX - Normal 5-63
Polling RX Report 8-18
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
14.1
14
Index by item
Polling TX 7-8
Polling TX - Bulletin 5-66
Polling TX - Normal 5-65
Polling TX Report 8-18
Port Number 5-27
Preview - View Pages 5-11
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting 5-12
Preview - View Status 5-12
Print DSN Message 8-23
Print E-mail Message Body 8-24, 10-39
Print MDN Message 8-23
Print Settings 11-29
Print/Fax Output Setting - Fax 10-14
Printing upon data reception 6-8
Program List 8-10
Q
Quick Memory TX 5-62
R
Receiver RX Ability 5-26
Receiving 6-3
Receiving (G3) 6-3
Receiving (I-FAX) 6-5
Receiving (IP) 6-6
Receiving E-mails automatically 6-5
Receiving E-mails manually 6-5
Redialing 5-69
Reference 5-28
Registering a scan/fax program 9-22
Registering an E-mail setting text 9-21
Registering E-mail setting subjects 9-21
Registering groups 9-20
Relay distribution 7-6
Relay Request Report 8-21
Relay TX Result Report 8-21
Report Settings 10-29
Reports 8-3
Reserration Polling TX Report 8-19
Reservation Communication Report 8-19
Reset Data After Job 10-10
Resolution 5-37
Restrict Access to Job Settings 10-9
Restrict Operation 10-10
Restrict User Access 10-9
Restriction on file name 2-6
S
Scan Setting 5-39
Scan Settings 3-18, 5-36
Scan Size 5-44
Scan/Fax Settings 9-26, 9-28
Search 5-22, 5-31
Search Option 5-24
Search Option Settings 9-28
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Security 11-24
Security Details 10-12, 10-34
Select Line 5-59
Send & Print 5-52
Sender Fax No. 10-33
Sending
Advanced Preview 5-13
Operation Flow 5-3
Separate Scan 5-54
Sequence Polling Rx Reserved Report 8-20
Sequential Polling RX Report 8-18
Sharpness 5-46
Simplex/Duplex 5-37
SMB transmission 2-8
Specifications 13-3
Stamp 5-51
Stamp Composition 5-41
Stamp Settings - Fax TX Settings 10-15
Stamp/Composition 5-49
Store Address 11-20, 11-30
Subject 5-60
System Settings 11-23
T
Timer TX 5-64
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) 5-56
Touch panel 3-6
TSI Distribution 7-4
TSI User Box Setting 10-28
TX Result Report 8-14
TX Stamp 5-53
TX/RX Setting 10-20
U
URL Notification Setting 5-61
User Authentication/Account Track 11-25
User Box 11-18, 11-28
User Box filing 2-8
User Mode 9-3, 11-16
User Name 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
User Settings 9-26
V
V34 OFF 5-59
W
Web Connection 11-3
Web Service 2-9
Web service 4-7, 13-4
WebDAV transmission 2-9
Z
Z-Folded Original 5-55
14-5
14
14.2
Index by button
Index by button
Numerics
1-Sided 5-37
2-Sided 5-37
A
Access 3-4
Accessibility 3-4
Action when TSI User Box is not set. 10-28
Activity Report 10-29, 10-30
Add Content-Type Information 10-42
Address 9-22
Address Book 5-20, 9-24
Address Book Index Default 9-26
Address Search 5-20
Address Type 5-22
Administrator Settings 10-9
Advanced Search 5-33
All Jobs 3-12, 3-14, 3-16, 3-17
AND 5-34
Annotation 5-49
anonymous 9-15
Application 5-12, 5-46, 5-47, 5-49, 5-52, 5-53
Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations 9-24
Auto 5-56
Auto Color 5-43
B
Background Removal 5-45
Basic 5-12
Binding Position 5-48, 5-56
Binding position 5-12
Black 5-43
Black Compression Level 9-28, 10-40
Bleed Removal 5-45
Body 5-60, 9-21
Book Copy 5-47
Book Erase 5-47, 5-48
Book Spread 5-47
Broadcast Result Report 10-30
Bulletin 5-63, 5-66
Bulletin Board User Box 9-24
Bulletin TX Report 10-30
C
C 3-4
Center Erase 5-48
Change Setting 5-11
Changes Allowed 5-41
Changing the From Address 10-10
Check Address 9-23
Check Dest. & Send 5-59, 9-11
Check E-Mail Settings 3-19, 9-23
14-6
14.2
Check Job 3-9
Check Job Set. 3-11, 3-13, 9-23
Check Job Settings 3-18
Check Original Settings 3-19, 9-23
Check Program Settings 9-20
Check Scan Settings 3-18, 9-23
Check URL Notif. Destination 9-23
Check/Change Temporary 5-52
City 5-34
Closed Network RX 10-25
Color 5-43
Color Background 5-45
Color TIFF Type 9-29
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression
Method 10-40
Comm. List 3-14, 3-16, 3-17
Communication Method Settings 5-62
Communication Settings 3-19, 5-20, 5-58, 9-23
Compact PDF 5-38
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level 9-29
Compact XPS 5-38
Company Name 5-34
Compression Type 5-26, 10-41
Confidential RX Report 10-30
Confidential User Box 9-24
Confirm Address (Register) 10-24
Confirm Address (TX) 10-24
Copied Paper 5-36
Copies 5-52
Copy 3-5
Cover + 2-Sided 5-37
Custom Size 5-44
D
Date Format 5-49
Date/Time 5-49, 5-52, 10-11
Default Address Book 9-27
Default Address Type 9-27
Default Scan/Fax Settings 9-29
Default Tab 9-26
Delete 3-10, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16, 9-23
Deleted Jobs 3-12, 3-14, 3-16, 3-17
Density 5-42
Department 5-34
Despeckle 5-57
Destination Check Display Function 10-23
Destination Machine Type 5-27, 9-18
Destination Settings 3-18
Detail 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17,
5-31
Detail Search 5-24, 5-61
Detail Settings 5-40, 5-41
Detailed Settings 5-29, 5-30
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
14.2
14
Index by button
Dialing Method 10-18, 10-32
Digital Signature 5-67
Direct Input 5-20, 5-61
Document 5-12
Document Name 5-54, 5-59
Document Permissions 5-40
Dot Matrix Original 5-36
DSN Message 10-39
DSN Request 10-41
Duplex Print (RX) 10-20
E
ECM OFF 5-58, 9-11
E-Mail 9-7
E-mail 5-25
E-mail Addr. 5-33
E-Mail Address 9-8, 9-19
E-Mail Encryption 5-67
E-Mail Settings 5-59
Encryption 5-40
ENDS WITH 5-34
Enlarge Display 3-4
Enter Power Save Mode 10-14
F
Fax 5-25, 9-10, 10-14
Fax Active Screen 9-27
Fax Header Settings 5-68
Fax Number 5-33, 9-10
Fax TX Settings 10-15
Fax/Scan 3-5
F-Code TX 5-67, 10-23
File After Polling TX 10-21
File Path 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17
File Type 5-38
Fine-Tune 5-49, 5-50, 5-51
Finish 5-12
Finished Jobs 3-12, 3-14, 3-16, 3-17
First Name 5-33
Footer Position 10-17
Footer Settings 5-52
Forward 3-15
Forward Dest. 10-26
Forward TX Setting 10-26
Frame Erase 5-12, 5-46, 5-47
From 5-60
Front + Back Covers 5-47
Front Cover 5-47
FTP 5-29, 9-14
Full Color 5-43
Function Settings 10-23, 10-33
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
G
Gray Scale 5-43
Group 5-22, 9-20, 9-25
Guidance 3-4
H
Header Information 10-16
Header Position 10-17
Header Settings 5-52
Header Settings, Footer Settings 10-11
Header/Footer 5-51
Header/Footer Position 10-17
Header/Footer Settings 10-11
Host Address 9-13, 9-15, 9-17
Host Name 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
I
Icon 9-8, 9-9, 9-11, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17, 9-18, 9-19,
9-20
Image 5-41
Image Adjustment 5-45
Incomplete TX Hold 10-27
Incorrect User Box No. Entry 10-20
Increase Priority 3-11
Index 5-23, 9-8, 9-9, 9-11, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17, 9-18,
9-19
Internet Fax 5-26, 9-19
Internet Fax Advanced Settings 10-41
Internet Fax Self RX Ability 10-41
Interrupt 3-4
IP Address 9-18
IP Address Fax 5-27, 9-18
J
Job Details 3-10
Job History 5-20
Job List 3-9
Job Settings List 8-14, 10-31
JPEG 5-38
JPEG Compression Level 9-28
L
L1 3-13
L2 3-13
Last Name 5-33
Left 5-56
Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 10-20
Line Monitor Sound 10-19, 10-32
Line Monitor Sound Vol. 10-19
Line Parameter Setting 10-18, 10-32
Line Setting 5-58, 5-59, 9-11
Line Settings 9-11
Long Original 5-55
14-7
14
Index by button
M
Maximum Resolution 10-41
MDN Message 10-39
MDN Request 10-41
MDN Response 10-41
MDN/DSN Response Monitoring Time 10-41
Memory RX Setting 10-24
Min. Reduction for RX Print 10-21
Mixed Original 5-55
Mode Memory 3-4
Multi Line Settings 10-32
Multi Line Usage Settings 10-33
Multi Page 5-39
N
Name 5-33, 9-8, 9-9, 9-10, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17,
9-18, 9-19, 9-20, 9-22, 10-11
Network Fax RX Error Report 10-38
Network Fax Settings 10-40
Next Destination 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
Next Page 5-11
No. 9-8, 9-9, 9-10, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17, 9-18, 9-19
No. of Sets (RX) 10-22
Normal 5-63, 5-65
Number of Redials 10-18
Number of RX Call Rings 10-18, 10-32
O
Off-Hook 5-20, 5-35
One-Touch/User Box Registration 9-7
OR 5-34
Original Direction 5-55
Original Settings 5-20, 5-55
Original Size 5-12
Original Type 5-36
Other 5-52, 10-11
Output Method 10-26
Output Settings 10-29
Output Time Settings 10-29
Overseas TX 5-58, 9-11
P
Page Number 5-50
Page Number Type 5-50
Page Rotation 5-11
Page Separation 5-39
Pages 5-49, 5-51, 5-52, 10-11
Paper Size 5-26, 10-41
Password 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-40, 9-13, 9-15, 9-17
Password Check 10-27
Password TX 5-64
PASV 5-29, 9-15
PBX Connection Setting 10-29
PC (SMB) 5-28, 9-12
PC-Fax RX Settings 10-27
PC-Fax TX Error Report 10-30
PC-FAX TX Setting 10-33
14-8
14.2
PDF 5-38
Photo 5-36
Photo Paper 5-36
Photo Size 5-45
Polling RX 5-63
Polling TX 5-65, 5-66
Port Number 5-27, 5-29, 5-30, 9-15, 9-17, 9-18
Position Setting 5-53
Power Save 3-3
Preset Stamp Type 5-51
Prev. Page 5-11
Print 3-10, 10-27, 10-28
Print E-mail Message Body 10-39
Print Paper Selection 10-20
Print Paper Size 10-20
Print Position 5-49, 5-50, 5-51
Print Receiver's Name 10-17
Print Separate Fax Pages 10-21
Print/Fax Output Settings 10-14
Printed Photo 5-36
Printing Allowed 5-40
Program 9-25
Program Default 9-26
Proof Copy 3-4
Proxy 5-29, 5-30, 9-15, 9-17
Q
Quality Adjustment 5-46
Quick Memory TX 5-62
R
Recall Header/Footer 5-52
Receive 3-10
Receive Mode 10-18
Receiver RX Ability 5-26
Receiving User Box Destination 10-27
Redial 3-13, 3-15
Redial Interval 10-18
Reference 5-28, 9-13
Registering and Changing Addresses 10-10
Relay Printing 10-23
Relay Request Report 10-30
Relay RX 10-23
Relay TX Result Report 10-30
Relay User Box 9-24
Release Held Job 3-11
Report Settings 10-29
Reset 3-4
Reset Data After Job 10-10
Resolution 5-26, 5-37, 10-41
Restrict Access to Job Settings 10-9
Restrict Broadcasting 10-10
Restrict Operation 10-10
Restrict User Access 10-9
RX Ability (Destination) 9-19
RX Display 9-27
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
14.2
14
Index by button
S
Save 3-10
Scan Setting 5-39
Scan Settings 5-20, 5-36
Scan Size 5-44
Scan/Fax Settings 9-26, 9-28
Search 5-22, 5-31, 5-33
Search Option Screen 9-28
Search Option Settings 9-28
Security Details 10-34
Select Group 9-20
Select Line 9-11, 10-26
Send 3-10
Send & Print 5-52
Sender 10-16
Sender Fax No. 10-16, 10-33
Separate Scan 5-54
Separation 5-47
Sequential TX Report 10-30
Sharpness 5-46
Shortcut Key 1 9-26
Shortcut Key 2 9-26
Simplex/Duplex 5-37, 5-52
SSL Settings 5-30, 9-17
Stamp 5-51
Stamp Composition 5-41
Stamp Setting 10-15
Stamp/Composition 5-49
Staple 5-53
Start 3-4
Starting Chapter Number 5-50
Starting Page Number 5-50
STARTS WITH 5-34
Stop 3-4
Sub power switch 3-3
Subject 5-60, 9-21
T
Time Format 5-49
Timer Reservation TX Report 10-30
Timer TX 5-64
Timer TX Job 3-13
Top 5-56
Total # of Pages (Quick Memory TX) 5-56
Tray Selection for RX Print 10-21
TSI User Box Registration 10-28
TSI User Box Setting 10-28
TWAIN Lock Time 9-29
TX Display 9-27
TX Result Report 10-30
TX Result Report Check 10-31
TX Stamp 5-53
TX/RX Setting 10-20
U
Uppercase and Lowercase Letters 9-28
URL Notif. Destination 9-22
URL Notification Setting 5-61
User Box 3-4, 5-26, 9-9
User ID 9-13, 9-15, 9-17
User Name 5-28, 5-29, 5-30
User Settings 9-26
Utility/Counter 3-4
V
V34 OFF 5-59, 9-11
View Finishing 5-11
W
WebDAV 5-30, 9-16
X
XPS 5-38
Z
Z-Folded Original 5-55
Zoom 5-11
Text 5-36, 5-41, 5-52, 10-11
Text Color 5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 10-11
Text Details 5-50, 5-52, 10-11
Text Size 5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 10-11
Text Type 5-50, 5-52, 10-11
Text/Photo 5-36
TIFF 5-38
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
14-9
14
14-10
Index by button
14.2
VL6522c/VL5522c/VL4522c
Reader's comment sheet
Reader's comment sheet
Questions
Have you found this manual to be accurate?
O Yes
O No
Were you able to operate the product, after reading this manual?
O Yes
O No
Does this manual provide sufficient background information?
O Yes
O No
Is the format of this manual convenient in size, readability and arrangement (page
layout, chapter order, etc.)?
O Yes
O No
Could you find the information you were looking for?
O Always
O Most of the times
O Sometimes
O Not at all
What did you use to find the required information?
O Table of contents
O Index
Are you satisfied with this manual?
O Yes
O No
Thank you for evaluating this manual.
If you have other comments or concerns, please explain or suggest improvements
overleaf or on a separate sheet.
Comments:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reader's comment sheet
Date:
This reader's comment sheet is completed by:
(If you prefer to remain unknown, please do fill in your occupation)
Name:
Occupation:
Company:
Phone:
Address:
City:
Country:
Please return this sheet to:
Océ-Technologies B.V.
For the attention of ITC User Documentation.
P.O. Box 101,
5900 MA Venlo
The Netherlands
Send your comments by E-mail to: itc-userdoc@oce.com
For the addresses of local Océ organisations see: http://www.oce.com
Addresses of local Océ organisations
Addresses of local Océ organisations
[1]
Océ-Australia Ltd.
P.O. Box 363
Ferntree Gully MDC
Vic 3165
Australia
http://www.oce.com.au/
Océ-Österreich GmbH
Postfach 95
1233 Vienna
Austria
http://www.oce.at/
Océ-Belgium N.V./S.A.
J. Bordetlaan 32
1140 Brussel
Belgium
http://www.oce.be/
Océ-Brasil Comércio e Indústria Ltda.
Av. das Nações Unidas, 11.857
Brooklin Novo
São Paulo-SP 04578-000
Brasil
http://www.oce-brasil.com.br/
Océ-Canada Inc.
4711 Yonge Street, Suite 1100
Toronto, Ontario M2N 6K8
Canada
http://www.oce.ca/
Océ Office Equipment (Beijing) Co., Ltd.
Xu Mu Cheng
Chaoyang District
Beijing 100028
China
http://www.oce.com.cn/
Océ-Czech Republic ltd.
Hanusova 18
140 21 Praha 4
Czech Republic
http://www.oce.cz/
Océ-Danmark a/s
Vallensbækvej 45
2605 Brøndby
Denmark
http://www.oce.dk/
Océ Finland OY
Valkjärventie 7 D, PL 3
02130 Espoo
Finland
http://www.oce.fi/
Océ-France S.A.
32, Avenue du Pavé Neuf
93161 Noisy-le-grand, Cedex
France
http://www.oce.fr/
Océ-Deutschland GmbH
Solinger Straße 5-7
45481 Mülheim/Ruhr
Germany
http://www.oce.de/
Océ-Hong Kong and China head office
12/F 1202 The Lee Gardens
33 Hysan Avenue
Causeway Bay
Hong Kong
http://www.oce.com.hk/
Addresses of local Océ organisations
Océ-Hungaria Kft.
1241 Budapest
Pf.: 237
Hungary
http://www.oce.hu/
Océ-Ireland Ltd.
3006 Lake Drive
Citywest Business Campus
Saggart
Co. Dublin
Ireland
http://www.oce.ie/
Océ-Italia S.p.A.
Strada Padana Superiore 2/B
20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio (MI)
Italia
http://www.oce.it/
Océ Japan Corporation
3-25-1, Nishi Shinbashi
Minato-Ku
Tokyo 105-0003
Japan
http://www.ocejapan.co.jp/
Océ-Belgium S.A.
Rue Astrid 2/A
1143 Luxembourg-Belair
http://www.oce.lu/
Océ Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
#3.01, Level 3, Wisma Academy
Lot 4A, Jalan 19/1
46300 Petalig Jaya
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Malaysia
http://www.ocemal.com.my/
Océ-Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Prolongación Reforma 1236,
4to Piso
Col. Santa Fé, Del. Cuajimalpa
C.P. 05348
México, D.F.
México
http://www.oceusa.com/
Océ-Norge A.S.
Postboks 4434 Nydalen
Gjerdrums vei 8
0403 Oslo
Norway
http://www.oce.no/
Océ-Poland Ltd. Sp.z o.o.
ul. Bitwy Warszawskiej 1920 r. nr. 7
02-366 Warszawa
Poland
http://www.oce.com.pl/
Océ-Lima Mayer, S.A.
Av. José Gomes Ferreira, 11 Piso 2 Miraflores
1497-139 Algés
Portugal
http://www.oce.pt/
Océ Singapore Pte Ltd.
190 MacPherson Road
#03-00 Wisma Gulab
Singapore 348548
Océ Printing Systems (PTY) Ltd.
P.O.Box 629
Rivonia 2128
South Africa
Addresses of local Océ organisations
Océ España SA
Business Park Mas Blau
Osona, 2 08820 El Prat de Llobregat
Barcelona
Spain
http://www.oce.es/
Océ-Svenska AB
Sollentunavägen 84
191 27 Sollentuna
Sweden
http://www.oce.se/
Océ-Schweiz AG
Sägereistrasse 10
CH8152 Glattbrugg
Schweiz
http://www.oce.ch/
Océ (Thailand) Ltd.
B.B. Building 16/Floor
54 Asoke Road
Sukhumvit 21
Bangkok 10110
Thailand
Océ-Nederland B.V.
P.O.Box 800
5201 AV 's-Hertogenbosch
The Netherlands
http://www.oce.nl/
Océ (UK) Limited
Océ House
Chatham Way
Brentwood, Essex CM14 4DZ
United Kingdom
http://www.oce.co.uk/
Océ North America Inc.
5450 North Cumberland Avenue
Chicago, IL 60656
USA
http://www.oceusa.com/
Note: The web site http://www.oce.com gives the current addresses of the local Océ
organisations and distributors.
Note: The addresses of local Océ organisations for information about the Wide
Format Printing Systems and the Production Printing Systems can be different from
the addresses above. Refer to the web site http://www.oce.com for the addresses you
need.
.
Beyond the Ordinary
Printing for
Professionals
Download PDF
Similar pages